Bmw 2006 530I Sedan Owners Manual

Bmw-2006-525I-Sedan-Owners-Manual-761977 bmw-2006-525i-sedan-owners-manual-761977

Bmw-2006-530Xi-Sedan-Owners-Manual-694375 bmw-2006-530xi-sedan-owners-manual-694375

Bmw-2006-550I-Sedan-Owners-Manual-694376 bmw-2006-550i-sedan-owners-manual-694376

Bmw-2006-525I-Sedan-Owners-Manual-694372 bmw-2006-525i-sedan-owners-manual-694372

Bmw-2006-525Xi-Sedan-Owners-Manual-694373 bmw-2006-525xi-sedan-owners-manual-694373

: Bmw Bmw-2006-530I-Sedan-Owners-Manual-694374 bmw-2006-530i-sedan-owners-manual-694374 bmw pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 259 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

The Ultimate

Driving Machine

Owner's Manual

for Vehicle

Contents

A - Z

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

525i

530i

550i

525xi

530xi

Owner's Manual for Vehicle

Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.

Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with

enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore

have this request:

Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize

yourself with the information that we have compiled for you

before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data

and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use

and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical fea-

tures. The manual also contains information on maintenance

designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main-

taining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service

life.

This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide

Booklet for Canadian models.

We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.

BMW AG

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

© 2006 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Aktiengesellschaft

Munich, Germany

Reprinting, including excerpts,

only with the written consent of

BMW AG, Munich.

Order No. 01 41 0 012 211

US English II/06, 06 03 500

Printed in Germany

Printed on environmentally friendly paper,

bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Contents

The fastest way to find specific topics is to use

the index, refer to page 236.

Using this Owner's Manual

4Notes

7Reporting safety defects

At a glance

10 Cockpit

16 iDrive

22 Voice command system

Controls

28 Opening and closing

45 Adjustments

54 Transporting children safely

58 Driving

74 Everything under control

85 Technology for comfort, convenience

and safety

101 Lamps

105 Climate

111 Practical interior accessories

Driving tips

124 Things to remember when driving

Navigation

132 Starting navigation system

133 Destination entry

144 Destination guidance

149 What to do if …

Entertainment

152 On/off and tone

156 Radio

165 CD player and CD changer

171 External audio device

Communications

174 Telephoning

187 TeleService, BMW Assist

Mobility

194 Refueling

196 Wheels and tires

204 Under the hood

209 Maintenance

211 Replacing components

219 Giving and receiving assistance

Reference

226 Technical data

231 Short commands of voice command

system

236 Everything from A to Z

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Notes

4

Notes

Using this Owner's Manual

We have made every effort to ensure that you

are able to find what you need in this Owner's

Manual as quickly as possible. The fastest way

to find specific topics is to refer to the detailed

index at the back of the manual. If you wish to

gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will

find this in the first chapter.

Should you sell your BMW some day, please

remember to hand over the Owner's Manual

as well; it is an important component of your

vehicle.

Additional sources of information

Should you have any other questions, your

BMW center will be glad to advise you at any

time.

You can find information on BMW, e.g. on tech-

nology, on the Internet at www.bmwusa.com.

Symbols used

Indicates precautions that must be fol-

lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-

sibility of personal injury and serious damage to

the vehicle.

Indicates information that will assist you

in gaining the optimum benefit from your

vehicle and enable you to care more effectively

for your vehicle.

Refers to measures that can be taken to

help protect the environment.

<Marks the end of a specific item of informa-

tion.

*

Indicates special equipment, country-spe-

cific equipment and optional extras, as well as

equipment and functions not yet available at the

time of printing.

"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to

select individual functions.

{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice

command system.

{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the

voice command system.

Symbols on vehicle components

Indicates that you should consult the rel-

evant section of this Owner's Manual for

information on a particular part or assembly.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

5

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

The individual vehicle

When purchasing your BMW, you have decided

in favor of a model with individualized equip-

ment and features. This Owner's Manual

describes the entire array of options and equip-

ment available with a specific BMW model.

Please bear in mind that the manual may con-

tain information on accessories and equipment

that you have not specified for your own vehicle.

Sections describing options and special equip-

ment are marked by asterisks

*

to assist you in

identifying possible differences between the

descriptions in this manual and your own vehi-

cle's equipment.

If equipment in your BMW is not described in

this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accom-

panying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.

Editorial notice

BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing

development that is conceived to ensure that

our vehicles continue to embody the highest

quality and safety standards combined with

advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this

reason, it is possible that the features described

in this Owner's Manual could differ from those

on your vehicle.

For your own safety

Maintenance and repairs

Advanced technology, e.g. the use of

modern materials and high-performance

electronics, requires specially adapted mainte-

nance and repair methods. Therefore, have cor-

responding work on your BMW performed only

by your BMW center or a workshop that works

according to BMW repair procedures with cor-

respondingly trained personnel. If this work is

not carried out properly, there is a danger of

subsequent damage and related safety haz-

ards.<

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Notes

6

Parts and accessories

For your own safety, use genuine parts

and accessories approved by BMW.

When you purchase accessories tested and

approved by BMW and Genuine BMW Parts,

you simultaneously acquire the assurance that

they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to

ensure optimum performance when installed

on your vehicle.

BMW warrants these parts to be free from

defects in material and workmanship.

BMW will not accept any liability for damage

resulting from installation of parts and accesso-

ries not approved by BMW.

BMW cannot test every product made by other

manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a

BMW safely and without risk to either the vehi-

cle, its operation or its occupants.

Genuine BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and

other products approved by BMW, together

with professional advice on using these items,

are available from all BMW centers.

Installation and operation of non-BMW

approved accessories such as alarms, radios,

amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension

components, brake dust shields, telephones,

including operation of any mobile phone from

within the vehicle without using an externally

mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for

instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or

similar accessories, may cause extensive dam-

age to the vehicle, compromise its safety, inter-

fere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect

the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See

your BMW center for additional information.<

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of

the emission control devices and sys-

tems may be performed by any automotive

repair establishment or individual using any cer-

tified automotive part.<

California Proposition 65 Warning

California law requires us to issue the following

warning:

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of

automobile components and parts,

including components found in the interior fur-

nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to cause cancer

and birth defects and reproductive harm. In

addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and

certain products of component wear contain or

emit chemicals known to the State of California

to cause cancer and birth defects or other

reproductive harm.

Battery posts, terminals and related accesso-

ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash

your hands after handling.

Used engine oil contains chemicals that have

caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always

protect your skin by washing thoroughly with

soap and water.<

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

7

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Service and warranty

We recommend that you read this publication

thoroughly.

Your BMW is covered by the following warran-

ties:

>New Vehicle Limited Warranty

>Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

>Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty

>Federal Emissions Performance Warranty

>California Emission Control System Limited

Warranty

Detailed information about these warranties is

listed in the Service and Warranty Information

Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and

Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

Reporting safety defects

For US customers

The following applies only to vehicles owned

and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect

which could cause a crash or could cause injury

or death, you should immediately inform the

National Highway Traffic Safety Administration,

NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North

America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New

Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-

1117.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may

open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety

defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order

a recall and remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved in individual

problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of

North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle

Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-

trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,

Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain

other information about motor vehicle safety

from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a

safety-related defect to Transport Canada,

Defect Investigations and Recalls, may tele-

phone the toll free hotline 1-800-333-0510,

or contact Transport Canada by mail at: Trans-

port Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville Tower C,

330 Sparks Street, Ottawa ON K1A 0N5.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance

This overview of buttons, switches and displays

is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's

operating environment. The section will also

assist you in becoming acquainted with the

control concepts and options available for

operating the various systems.

At a glance

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Cockpit

10

Cockpit

Around the steering wheel: controls and displays

1Sedan: sun blind

*

for rear window 112

2Rear window safety switch 41

3Opening and closing windows 40

4Adjusting exterior mirror 51

Automatic parking function

*

52

5Turn signal 64

High beams,

headlamp flasher 102

High-beam assistant

*

103

Roadside parking lamps 102

Check Control 79

Computer 75

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance

11

Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

6Buttons on steering wheel

7Instrument cluster 12

10 Ignition lock 58

11 Horn: entire surface

14 Releasing hood 204

15 Opening luggage compartment lid/

tailgate 35,33

Mobile phone

*

174:

>Press: accepting and ending

call, starting dialing

*

for

selected phone number and

redialing if no phone number is

selected

>Press longer: redialing

Volume

Activating/deactivating voice

command system

*

22

Changing radio station

Selecting music track

Scrolling in phone book and in lists

with stored phone numbers

Individually programmable

*

53

Individually programmable 53

8Windshield wipers 65

Rain sensor 65

Sports Wagon: rear window

wiper 66

9Starting/stopping engine and

switching ignition on/off 58

12 Steering wheel heater

*

52

Steering wheel adjustment 52

13 Cruise control

*

66

Active cruise control

*

67

16 Head-Up Display

*

96

BMW Night Vision

*

98

17 Parking lamps 101

Low beams 101

Automatic headlamp control

*

101

Adaptive Head Light

*

102

High-beam assistant

*

103

18 Instrument lighting 104

Fog lamps

*

104

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Cockpit

12

Instrument cluster

1Indicator lamps for turn signals

2Speedometer

3Indicator and warning lamps 13

4Displays for active cruise control

*

70

5Tachometer 74

6Energy Control 75

7Display for

>Clock/date 74

>Outside temperature 74

>Indicator and warning lamps 79

>Speed of cruise control

*

66

>Desired speed for active cruise

control

*

67

8Displays for

>Odometer and trip odometer 74

>Computer 75

>Date and remaining travel distance

for service requirements 77

>Automatic transmission with

Steptronic

*

63

>SMG Sequential Manual

Transmission

*

61

>HDC Hill Descent Control

*

88

>High-beam assistant

*

103

> Check Control message present 79

9Fuel gauge 75

10 Resetting trip odometer 74

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance

13

Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Indicator and warning lamps

The concept

Indicator and warning lamps can light up both in

the display area 1 and in the display 2 in various

combinations and colors.

Some lights are tested for proper function by

briefly lighting up during starting of the engine

or when the ignition is switched on.

Explanatory text messages

Text message at the bottom edge of the Con-

trol Display explain the meaning of the dis-

played indicator and warning lamps.

Additional information, e.g. on the cause of a

malfunction and on the corresponding need to

take action can be displayed via the Check Con-

trol, refer to page 79.

In the case of corresponding urgency, this infor-

mation is displayed immediately when the

related lamp lights up.

Indicator lamps without text messages

The following indicator lamps in the display

area 1 indicate that the associated functions

are activated:

Handbrake engaged 60

Handbrake engaged for Canadian

models

Fog lamps

*

104

DTC Dynamic Traction Control 87

High beams/headlamp flasher 102

Lamp flashes:

DSC or DTC controls the drive and

braking forces for maintaining vehicle

stability 87

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Cockpit

14

Around the center console: controls and displays

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance

15

Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

1Microphone for handsfree mode for

telephone

*

and for voice command system

*

22

2Reading lamps 104

3Initiating

an emergency call 219

4Interior lamps 104

5Glass sunroof

*

, electric 41

Panorama glass sunroof

*

43

6Passenger airbag status lamp 95

7Control Display 16

Displays for menu navigation

8Hazard warning flashers

9Central locking system 32

10 Automatic climate control 105

11 Changing

>radio station 152

>track 152

12 Ejecting

>navigation DVD

*

132

>audio CD 152

13 Drive for navigation DVDs

*

132

14 Drive for audio CDs 152

15 Switching Entertainment sound output on/

off and adjusting volume 152

17 Controller 16

Turn, press or move horizontally in four

directions

18 Activating voice command system

*

22

19 Opening start menu on Control Display 17

20 Dynamic Driving Control

*

62

Temperature setting, left/

right 106

Automatic air distribution and

volume 106

Cooling function 107

AUC Automatic recirculated-air

control 108

Recirculated-air mode 108

Maximum cooling 107

Residual heat mode 108

Switching off automatic climate

control 108

Air volume 107

Defrosting windows and removing

condensation 107

Rear window defroster 105

16 Heated seats

*

50

Active seat ventilation

*

51

Adjusting active backrest

width

*

47

Active seat

*

51

PDC Park Distance Control

*

85

DTC Dynamic Traction Control 87

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

iDrive

16

iDrive

iDrive combines the functions of a large number

of switches. This allows these functions to be

operated from a central position. The following

section provides an introduction to basic menu

navigation. The control of the individual func-

tions is described in connection with the rele-

vant equipment.

Controls

1Control Display

2 button

Opening start menu

3Controller

With the controller you can select menu

items and make settings:

>move in four directions, arrows 4

>turn, arrow 5

>press, arrow 6

To avoid posing an unnecessary hazard

due to inattention, both to your own vehi-

cle's occupants and to other road users: never

attempt to use the controls or make entries

unless traffic and road conditions allow.<

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance

17

Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Menu overview

Communication

>Telephone

*

>BMW Assist

*

or TeleService

*

Navigation or onboard information

>Navigation system

*

>Onboard information, e.g. for displaying

the average fuel consumption

Entertainment

>Radio

>CD player and CD changer

*

>External audio device

Climate

>Air distribution

>Seat air conditioning

*

>Automatic program

>Parked car ventilation

*

menu

>Switching off Control Display

>Tone and display settings

>Settings for your vehicle, e.g. for the central

locking system

>Display of service requirements and dates

for statutory emission and vehicle inspec-

tions

>Settings for telephone

Operating principle

From radio readiness, refer to page 58, the fol-

lowing message is shown on the Control Dis-

play:

To clear the message:

Press the controller.

This displays the start menu.

On vehicles with a single drive, the message

automatically disappears after approx. 10 sec-

onds.

Start menu

You can call up all the functions of iDrive using

five menu items.

Opening start menu

Press the button.

To open the start menu from the menu:

Press the button twice.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

iDrive

18

Opening menu items of start menu

With the start menu you can open the menu

items Communication, Navigation, Entertain-

ment and Climate by moving the controller to

the left, right, front or rear.

You can open the menu by pressing the con-

troller.

Comfort opening of menu items

Comfort opening offers you:

>Opening of a menu item of the start menu in

the last display shown

>Direct switching between Communication,

Navigation, Entertainment and Climate

without pressing the button

For this purpose, move the controller in the cor-

responding direction and hold it for longer than

approx. 2 seconds.

Displays in menu

1Each menu is divided into fields. The

respective active field is highlighted.

2A symbol indicates the last selected menu

item of the start menu:

1Menu items are usually grouped in horizon-

tal or vertical lists.

2In these lists, arrows indicate the possibility

of accessing other menu items that are not

currently visible.

3Settings are displayed graphically or

numerically.

Communication

Navigation or onboard information

Entertainment

Climate

menu

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance

19

Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Operating principle at a glance

Basic operation via iDrive is described in this

view.

You can view the individual steps under Set-

tings on Control Display, Setting time, refer to

page 82.

1Selecting menu item:

>Turn the controller; the highlight moves

>Menu items shown in white can be

selected by highlighting

2Activating menu item:

>Press the controller

>New menu items are displayed or the

function is carried out

3Selecting menu item: refer to 1

4Changing between fields:

>Briefly move the controller left, right,

forward or back

>Release controller

>Active field appears lighter

5Adjusting settings:

>Turn controller

>Graphic display, numerical value or text

displays can be changed

>Acknowledgment by changing field

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

iDrive

20

Status information

1Display for:

>Entertainment:

Radio, CD

>Telephone

*

in "Communication":

Name of linked mobile phone, network

search or no network

>"BMW Assist"

*

:

Existing voice connection with a service

from BMW Assist

2Entertainment sound output off

3Display for:

> New entries present in "Missed calls"

*

> Roaming active

4 Telephoning

*

possible if the mobile

phone is logged-on in the vehicle

Mobile phone network with strong

reception, display dependent on mobile

phone

5Time

Other displays:

The status information is temporarily hidden

when there are Check Control instructions or

inputs via the voice command system

*

.

Assistance window*

Additional information can be displayed in the

assistance window:

>The computer or the trip computer

*

>The arrow or map view with a navigation

system

*

>The current position

Selecting display

1. Move the controller to the right to change to

the assistance window and press the con-

troller.

2. Select a menu item.

3. Press the controller.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance

21

Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Switching assistance window off/on

1. Move the controller to the right to change to

the assistance window and press the con-

troller.

2. Select "Assist. window off" and press the

controller.

To switch on, change to the assistance window

and press the controller.

Switching Control Display

off/on

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Display off" and press the control-

ler.

To switch on, press the controller.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Voice command system

22

Voice command system

The concept

The voice command system allows you to con-

trol operation of various vehicle systems with-

out ever removing your hands from the steering

wheel.

Individual menu items on the Control Display

can be spoken as commands. This frees you of

having to use the controller.

The voice command system transforms your

oral commands into control signals for the

selected systems and provides support in the

form of instructions or questions.

The voice command system uses a special

microphone located in the area of the interior

rearview mirror, refer to page 14.

Precondition

Via iDrive, set the language that applies for the

voice command system in order to enable iden-

tification of the spoken commands. To set the

language of iDrive, refer to page 84.

Symbols in Owner's Manual

Voice commands

Activating voice command system

1. Press the button.

This symbol on the Control Display and

an acoustic signal tell you that the voice

command system can respond to com-

mands.

2. Say the command.

The command is displayed on the Control

Display.

This symbol is shown on the Control Display

when you can input additional commands.

*

{...} Say the specified commands word for

word.

{{...}} Indicates responses of the voice

command system.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance

23

Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

If no other commands are possible, then oper-

ate the equipment using iDrive.

Terminating or canceling voice

command system

Press the button on the steering wheel or in

the center console

or

Commands

Having possible commands read aloud

You can have the system read aloud the possi-

ble commands related to the selected menu

item on the Control Display.

To have the system list the possible com-

mands:

For example, if you have selected "CD", the

system will read aloud the possible commands

for operating the CD player and the CD

changer

*

.

Opening help

Using alternative commands

There are often a number of commands to run a

function, e.g.:

Running functions directly with short

commands

With short commands you can carry out certain

functions directly, regardless of which menu

item is selected, refer to page 231.

Opening start menu

Example: selecting a track

1. Switch on Entertainment sound output if

necessary.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel

or in the center console.

5. Press the button on the steering wheel

or in the center console.

{Cancel}

{Options}

{Help}

{Radio on} or {Turn radio on}

{Main menu}

3. {Entertainment}

The system says:

{{Entertainment}}

4. {CD}

The system says:

{{CD drive switched on}}

6. Select track, e.g.:

{Track 1}

The system says:

{{Track 1}}

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Voice command system

24

Notes

The mobile phone can also be operated

with voice commands, refer to

page 183.<

For voice commands, bear the following in

mind:

>Say the commands and numbers smoothly

and at normal volume, avoiding excessive

emphasis and pauses. This also applies to

spelling when entering the destination.

>Always issue commands in the language of

the voice command system.

>When selecting a radio station, use the

common pronunciation of the station name.

>For entries in the voice-activated phone

book, only use names in the language of the

voice command system and no abbrevia-

tions.

>Keep the doors, windows and glass sun-

roof

*

or panorama glass sunroof

*

closed to

avoid interfering outside noise.

>Avoid making other noise in the vehicle

while speaking.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance

25

Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

This chapter is intended to provide you with

information for complete control of your vehicle.

Its extensive array of features and accessories,

both for driving and for your own safety,

comfort and convenience, are described here.

Controls

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Opening and closing

28

Opening and closing

Keys/remote control

1Remote control with integrated key

2Spare key

3Adapter for spare key, in glove compart-

ment

Remote control with integrated key

Each remote control contains a battery which is

automatically charged in the ignition lock while

driving. Drive a longer distance with each

remote control at least twice a year to keep the

battery charged. For comfort access

*

, the

remote control contains a replaceable battery,

refer to page 40.

Depending on which remote control is detected

by the vehicle during unlocking, different set-

tings are called up and carried out in the vehicle,

refer to Personal Profile, page 29.

Information on the required maintenance is also

stored in the remote control, refer to Service

data in remote control, page 209.

Integrated key

Press the button 1 to unlock the key.

The integrated key fits the following locks:

>Glove compartment, refer to page 113

>Sports Wagon: floor panel flap in cargo area,

refer to page 118

>Driver's door, refer to page 32

>Luggage compartment lid, refer to page 33.

New remote controls

To obtain additional or replace lost keys, new

remote controls with an integrated key are

available at your BMW center.

Spare key

Store the spare key in a safe place such as your

wallet. This key is not intended for regular use.

The spare key and integrated key fit the same

locks.

Adapter for spare key

The adapter is required so that the vehicle can

be started with the spare key or radio readiness

can be switched on.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

29

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Remove the adapter from the holder in the

glove compartment and slide the spare key into

the adapter before use.

Personal Profile

The concept

You can set a number of functions of your BMW

individually according to your preferences. Per-

sonal Profile ensures that most of these set-

tings are stored for the remote control currently

in use without you having to do anything. When

the vehicle is unlocked, the corresponding

remote control is detected and the settings

stored for it are called up and carried out.

This means that you will always find your BMW

set to your own personal settings even if

another person with his/her own remote control

and settings has used the vehicle since the last

time you drove it. The individual settings are

stored for a maximum of four remote controls.

Personal Profile settings

Details on the settings are provided on the

specified pages.

>When unlocking with the remote control,

either unlock only the driver's door or the

entire vehicle, refer to page 30

>Locking the vehicle after a short time or

after starting off, refer to page 32

>Assigning the programmable buttons

*

on

the steering wheel, refer to page 53

>Settings for the display on the Control Dis-

play:

>Brightness of the Control Display, refer

to page 83

>Measuring units for consumption, route/

distances, temperature, and pressure,

refer to page 84

>Language on Control Display, refer to

page 84

>12h/24h mode of the clock, refer to

page 83

>Date format, refer to page 83

>Showing optical warning for PDC Park Dis-

tance Control

*

, refer to page 85

>Selection and brightness of display in

Head-Up Display

*

, refer to page 97

>Display settings of BMW Night Vision

*

,

refer to page 99

>Air distribution, temperature in the upper

body area and intensity of the automatic air

conditioning system, refer to page 106

>Setting voice instructions for destination

guidance in the navigation system

*

, refer to

page 147

In addition, the following, most recently

selected settings are recalled during unlocking:

>Positions of driver's seat, outside mirrors,

and steering wheel

*

, refer to page 47

>Audio sources, volume and tone settings,

refer to page 153

>Radio, displaying stored stations, refer to

page 156

>Telephone, setting volume, refer to

pages 178,184

Central locking system

The concept

The central locking system is ready for opera-

tion whenever the driver's door is closed.

The system simultaneously engages and

releases the locks on the following:

>Doors

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Opening and closing

30

>Luggage compartment lid or tailgate and

rear window

>Fuel filler door

Operating from outside

>via the remote control

>via the door lock

>with comfort access

*

via the door handles

At the same time, the anti-theft system is also

operated. It prevents the doors from being

unlocked using the lock buttons or door han-

dles. The interior lamps and the courtesy

lamps

*

are also switched on and off with the

remote control. The alarm system

is armed/

disarmed at the same time.

You can find more detailed information on the

alarm system

on page 37.

Operating from inside

Via the button for central locking, refer to

page 32. The fuel filler door is not locked.

In an accident of sufficient severity, the central

locking system automatically unlocks the vehi-

cle. In addition, the hazard warning flashers and

interior lamps come on.

Opening and closing: from

outside

Sports Wagon with xDrive: the vehicle is

raised somewhat at the rear after locking.

This is normal and is linked to minor noises.<

Using remote control

Because any persons or animals left unat-

tended in a parked vehicle could lock the

doors from the inside, you should always keep

the remote control with you; this precaution

ensures that you will remain able to unlock the

vehicle from the outside at all times.<

Unlocking

Press the button.

This unlocks the vehicle.

You can set how the vehicle is unlocked. The

setting is stored for the remote control currently

in use.

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the

controller.

4. Select "Door locks" and press the control-

ler.

5. Select "Central locking" and press the con-

troller.

6. Select "Unlock button" and press the con-

troller.

7. Select a menu item:

>"All doors"

Press the button once to unlock the

entire vehicle.

>"Driver's door only"

Press the button once to unlock only

the driver's door and the fuel filler door.

Press the button twice to unlock the

entire vehicle.

8. Press the controller.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

31

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Convenience opening

Press the button longer. The windows and

the glass sunroof

*

open.

Locking

Press the button.

Switching on interior lamps

With vehicle locked:

Press the button.

You can also use this function to locate your

vehicle in parking garages etc.

Panic mode*

You can also trigger the alarm system in case of

danger:

Press the button for at least 3 seconds.

Switch off alarm: press any button.

Sedan: opening luggage

compartment lid

Press the button for approx. 1 second.

The luggage compartment lid opens, regard-

less of whether it was previously locked or

unlocked.

During opening, the luggage compart-

ment lid pivots back and up. Ensure that

adequate clearance is available before opening.

To prevent accidentally locking yourself out,

never lay the remote control in the luggage

compartment. A previously locked luggage

compartment lid is also locked again after clos-

ing.<

Sports Wagon: unlocking tailgate

Press the button for approx. 1 second.

The tailgate will open slightly, regardless of

whether it was previously locked or unlocked.

During opening, the tailgate pivots back

and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is

available before opening.

To prevent accidentally locking yourself out,

never lay the remote control in the luggage

compartment. A previously locked tailgate is

also locked again after closing.

When opening the tailgate, the roll-up cover is

raised. Before closing the tailgate, press down

the roll-up cover until it engages.<

If pointed or sharp-edged objects could

strike the rear window while driving, be

sure to provide protection around all edges.

Failure to do so could result in damage to the

heating conductors of the rear window.<

Setting confirmation signals

You can vary or also deactivate the confirmation

signals for locking or unlocking.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the

controller.

4. Select "Door locks" and press the control-

ler.

5. Select "Confirmation" and press the con-

troller.

6. Select the desired signal.

7. Press the controller.

The signal is activated.

Malfunctions

The remote control may malfunction due to

local radio waves. Should the remote control fail

to operate owing to interference of this kind,

unlock and lock the vehicle via the door lock

using a key.

If it is no longer possible to lock the vehicle

using the remote control, then the battery is

discharged. Use this remote control during an

extended drive; this will recharge the battery,

refer to page 28.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Opening and closing

32

For US owners only

The transmitter and receiver units comply with

part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication

Commission regulations. Operation is gov-

erned by the following:

FCC ID:

LX8766S

LX8766E

LX8CAS

LX8CAS2

Compliance statement:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

>This device must not cause harmful inter-

ference, and

>this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or

changes to these devices could void the

user's authority to operate this equipment.<

Using door lock

When unlocking

1. Turning the key once unlocks the driver's

door and the fuel filler door.

2. Turning the key a second time unlocks the

remaining doors and the luggage compart-

ment lid/tailgate.

Convenience operation

You also have the option of operating the win-

dows and the glass sunroof

*

from the driver's

door lock.

Turn and hold the key in the positions for

unlocking or locking.

Watch during the closing process to be

sure that no one is injured. Releasing the

key stops the operation.<

Manual operation

In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can

turn a key all the way to the right or left in the

door lock to lock or unlock the driver's door.

Opening and closing: from

inside

This button serves to unlock or lock doors and

the luggage compartment lid or tailgate and

rear window with the front doors closed, but

does not activate the anti-theft system. The fuel

filler door remains unlocked.

You can also set the situations in which the

vehicle is locked.

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the

controller.

4. Select "Door locks" and press the control-

ler.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

33

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

5. Select "Central locking" and press the con-

troller.

6. Select a menu item:

>"Relock door if not opened"

The central locking system automati-

cally locks the vehicle after a short time

when no door has been opened.

>"Lock after driving"

The central locking system automati-

cally locks the vehicle as soon as you

start to drive.

7. Press the controller.

The setting is selected.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Unlocking and opening doors

>Either unlock the doors together with the

button for the central locking system and

then pull the door handle above the armrest

or

>pull on the door handle of each door twice:

the first time unlocks the door, the second

time opens it.

Locking

>Use the central locking button to lock all of

the doors simultaneously, or

>press down the lock button of a door.

To prevent you from being locked out, the

open driver's door cannot be locked using

the lock button.

Because any persons or animals left unat-

tended in a parked vehicle could lock the

doors from the inside, you should always keep

the remote control with you; this precaution

ensures that you will remain able to unlock the

vehicle from the outside at all times.<

Doors

Automatic soft closing*

To close the doors, merely press it closed gen-

tly. The closing process will then be carried out

automatically.

Make sure that the closing path of the

doors is clear; as otherwise injuries may

result.<

Luggage compartment lid/

tailgate

During opening, the luggage compart-

ment lid/tailgate pivots back and up.

Ensure that adequate clearance is available

before opening.<

Sedan

Opening from inside

Press the button: the luggage compartment lid

opens unless it has been locked.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Opening and closing

34

Opening from outside

Press the button on the luggage compartment

lid or the button on the remote control for

approx. 1 second: the luggage compartment lid

opens.

All keys, refer to page 28, fit the luggage-

compartment lid lock.

Locking separately

Turn a key in the lock of the luggage compart-

ment lid to the right past a resistance point and

remove it in the horizontal position.

This locks the luggage compartment lid and

disconnects it from the central locking system.

If you then hand over the remote control without

the integrated key, refer to page 28, no access

is possible via the luggage compartment lid.

This is an advantage when using valet parking,

for example.

Unlocking again and opening manually

Turn the key toward the left up to the stop: the

luggage compartment lid opens.

If you use the lock to unlock the luggage

compartment lid while the alarm system

is armed, the alarm will be triggered. You should

therefore unlock the vehicle ahead of time. If the

alarm is inadvertently triggered: switch off the

alarm, refer to page 38.<

Closing

Make sure that the closing path of the

luggage compartment lid is clear, other-

wise injuries may result.<

The handle recesses on the interior trim of the

luggage compartment lid make it easier to pull

down.

Emergency release

Pull lever in luggage compartment. The lug-

gage compartment lid is unlocked.

Sports Wagon: opening and closing

rear window

Small items can be loaded and unloaded

quickly when the rear window is opened sepa-

rately.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

35

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Press the button: the rear window opens some-

what. It can be swung upward.

Press the window closed to close.

When opening the rear window, the roll-

up cover is raised. Before closing the rear

window, press down the roll-up cover until it

engages.<

If pointed or sharp-edged objects could

strike the rear window while driving, be

sure to provide protection around all edges.

Failure to do so could result in damage to the

heating conductors of the rear window.<

Automatic roll-up cover*

When opening the rear window, the roll-up

cover is raised, and when the rear window is

closed, it is lowered.

Make sure that the closing area of the roll-

up cover is clear of obstructions, as other-

wise the payload or the roll-up cover may be

damaged.<

Details on the roll-up cover are provided on

page 117.

Sports Wagon: tailgate

Opening from inside

Press the button: the tailgate opens somewhat

unless it has been locked.

Opening from outside

Press the button on the tailgate or the but-

ton on the remote control for approx. 1 second:

the tailgate opens somewhat. It can be swung

upward.

When opening the tailgate, the roll-up

cover is raised. Before closing the tail-

gate, press down the roll-up cover until it

engages.<

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Opening and closing

36

Opening manually

In case of an electrical defect:

1. From the cargo area, press out the cover 1

on the tailgate with a screwdriver.

2. Press the locking bar 2 in the direction of

the arrow.

3. Open the tailgate and press in the cover

again.

The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is

closed.

Closing

Make sure that the closing path of the tail-

gate is clear, otherwise injuries may

result.<

The handle recesses on the interior trim of the

tailgate make it easier to pull down.

To close the tailgate, merely press it down gen-

tly. The closing process will then be carried out

automatically.

Sports Wagon: automatic tailgate

operation*

Adjusting opening height

You can adjust how far the tailgate is to open.

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the

controller.

4. Select "Door locks" and press the control-

ler.

5. Select "Tailgate" and press the controller.

6. Turn the controller. The adjustment is

applied; the field can be changed.

Opening tailgate

The tailgate opens automatically when you:

>Press the button on the outside of the tail-

gate when the vehicle is unlocked.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

37

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

>Press the button in the driver's foot-

well.

>Press the button on the remote control

for approx. 1 second.

During opening, the tailgate pivots back

and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is

available before opening.<

To interrupt opening:

>Press the button on the outside of the tail-

gate.

>Press and hold the button on the remote

control.

>Press the button on the inside of the tail-

gate.

Automatic roll-up cover

When the tailgate or rear window is opened, the

roll-up cover is raised, and when the tailgate

and rear window is closed, it is lowered.

Make sure that the closing area of the roll-

up cover is clear of obstructions, as other-

wise the payload or the roll-up cover may be

damaged.<

Details on the roll-up cover are provided on

page 117.

Closing tailgate

Make sure that the closing path of the tail-

gate is clear, otherwise injuries may

result.<

The tailgate closes automatically when the but-

ton on the inside of the tailgate is pressed.

To interrupt closing:

>Press the button on the inside of the tail-

gate.

>Press the button on the outside of the tail-

gate.

Closing is not canceled when you put the

vehicle into motion.<

Alarm system

The concept

The vehicle alarm system responds:

>When a door, the hood or the luggage com-

partment lid/tailgate or rear window is

opened

>To movements in the vehicle: Interior

motion sensor, refer to page 38

>To changes in the vehicle's tilt if someone

attempts to steal the wheels or tow the

vehicle

>To interruptions in battery voltage

Unauthorized operations are briefly signaled by

the alarm system:

>with an acoustic alarm

>by switching on

the hazard warning flashers

>by flashing the high beams

Arming and disarming alarm system

When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with

the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm

system is armed or disarmed at the same time.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Opening and closing

38

The luggage compartment lid/tailgate can also

be opened with the system armed with the

button on the remote control, refer to page 33.

When the luggage compartment lid/tailgate is

closed, it is locked and monitored again.

Switching off alarm

>Unlock the vehicle using the remote control,

refer to page 30.

>Insert the remote control all the way into the

ignition lock.

Indicator lamp displays

>The indicator lamp under the inside rear-

view mirror flashes continuously: the sys-

tem is armed.

>The indicator lamp flashes after locking:

doors, hood, luggage compartment lid/tail-

gate or rear window

is/are not properly

closed. Even if you do not close the alerted

area, the system begins to monitor the

remaining areas, and the indicator lamp

flashes continuously after approx. 10 sec-

onds. However, the interior motion sensor

is not activated.

>The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:

your vehicle has not been disturbed while

you were away.

>The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking

until the remote control is inserted into the

ignition lock, however for a maximum of

approx. 5 minutes: your vehicle has been

disturbed while you were away.

Tilt alarm sensor

The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm

system reacts, e.g. in case of an attempted

wheel theft or towing.

Interior motion sensor

In order for the interior motion sensor to func-

tion properly, the windows and glass sunroof

*

must be completely closed.

Avoiding unintentional alarms

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor

may be switched off at the same time. This pre-

vents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the following

situations:

>In stacking garages

>When transporting on car-carrying trains

>When animals are to remain in the vehicle

Switching off tilt alarm sensor and

interior motion sensor

Press the button on the remote control

again as soon as the vehicle is locked.

The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then

flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and

the interior motion sensor are switched off until

the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subse-

quently locked again.

Comfort access*

Comfort access enables you to access your

vehicle without having to hold the remote con-

trol in your hand. It is sufficient to carry the

remote control with you, e.g. in your jacket

pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the

related remote control in the immediate vicinity

or in the interior.

Comfort access supports the following func-

tions:

>Unlocking/locking vehicle

>Comfort locking

>Opening luggage compartment lid/tailgate

separately

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

39

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

>Sports Wagon: opening rear window sepa-

rately

>Starting engine

Functional requirement

>The vehicle or the luggage compartment

lid/tailgate can only be locked if the vehicle

detects that the remote control you are car-

rying is outside the vehicle.

>The next unlocking and locking cycle is not

possible until after approx. 2 seconds.

>The engine can only be started if the vehicle

detects that the remote control is located in

the vehicle.

Comparison with ordinary remote

control

You can control the functions mentioned previ-

ously with the comfort access or by pressing

the buttons on the remote control. Therefore,

please familiarize yourself with the information

on opening and closing beginning on page 28

beforehand.

The special features when using comfort

access are described in the following.

Should a short delay occur when opening

or closing the windows or the glass sun-

roof, the system is checking whether a remote

control is located in the vehicle. Please repeat

opening or closing if necessary.<

Releasing

Completely grasp a door handle, arrow 1. This

corresponds to pressing the button.

If a remote control is detected in the interior

after unlocking, the electric steering-wheel lock

unlocks, refer to page 58.

Locking

>For the driver's door, touch the area high-

lighted in the picture, arrow 2, with your fin-

ger for approx. 1 second.

>For the remaining doors, touch the area

highlighted in the picture, arrow 3, with your

finger for approx. 1 second.

This corresponds to pressing the but-

ton.

Please make sure that the ignition and all

current consumers are switched off

before locking to save the battery.<

Comfort locking

Hold a finger or the back of the hand on the sur-

face, arrow 2 or 3.

The windows and the glass sunroof

*

are

closed.

Watch during the closing process to be

sure that no one is injured. Removing the

hand from the door handle stops the closing

process immediately.<

Opening luggage compartment lid/

tailgate separately

Press the button on the luggage compartment

lid/tailgate. This corresponds to pressing the

button.

If a remote control accidentally left in the

luggage compartment/cargo area is

detected in the locked vehicle after closing the

luggage compartment lid/tailgate or the rear

window, the lid or rear window opens again. The

hazard warning flashers flash and a signal

*

sounds.<

Sports Wagon: opening rear window

separately

Press the button on the rear window, refer to

page 34.

Switching on radio readiness

By briefly pressing the Start/Stop button, you

switch on the radio readiness, refer to page 58.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Opening and closing

40

When doing so, do not depress the brake

or clutch pedal, as otherwise the engine

will start immediately.<

Starting engine

You can start the engine or switch on the switch

on ignition if a remote control is located in the

interior of the vehicle. It need not be inserted in

the ignition lock, refer to page 58.

If you take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle with the engine running, a

warning lamp lights up. In addition, a message

appears on the Control Display. As long as no

remote control is detected in the vehicle, it is

only possible to restart the engine within

approx. 10 seconds after it is switched off.

Switching off engine with automatic

transmission

The engine can only be switched off in the

selector lever position P, refer to page 60.

To switch off the engine in the selector lever

position N, the remote control must be inserted

in the ignition lock.

Before driving into a car wash with

automatic transmission

1. Insert remote control into ignition lock.

2. Depress brake pedal.

3. Place selector lever in position N.

4. Switch off the engine.

The vehicle can roll.

Malfunction

The comfort access function may malfunction

due to local radio waves. Then open or close the

vehicle with the buttons on the remote control

or with a key. To start the engine following this,

insert the remote control in the ignition lock.

Replacing battery

The remote control for comfort access contains

a battery which must be replaced if necessary.

1. Remove integrated key from remote con-

trol, refer to page 28.

2. Remove cover.

3. Lay in new battery with positive side facing

upward.

4. Press cover closed.

Return used battery to a recycling collec-

tion point or to your BMW center.<

Windows

To prevent injuries, exercise care when

closing the windows and keep them in

your field of vision until they are shut.

Always take along the remote control when you

leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for

example, operate the windows and injure them-

selves.<

Opening, closing

>Press switch to resistance point:

The window continues to open as long as

you keep the switch pressed.

>Press switch beyond resistance point:

The window opens automatically. Pressing

the switch again stops the opening move-

ment.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

41

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

You can close the windows in the same manner

by pulling the switch.

Separate switches for the rear windows are

located in the rear.

For information on using the convenience oper-

ation at the door lock or with the remote control,

refer to page 31 or 32.

For information on comfort closing with comfort

access, refer to page 39.

After switching off ignition

You can still operate the windows with the

remote control removed or the ignition

switched off for approx. 1 minute, as long as

neither of the front doors has been opened.

Pinch protection system

If the closing force rises beyond a predefined

threshold during closing, the system will imme-

diately stop moving the window prior to lower-

ing it slightly.

Despite the pinch protection system,

inspect the window's travel path prior to

closing it, as the safety system might fail to

detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as

thin objects, and the window would continue

closing.

Pulling the switch beyond the resistance point

and holding it limits the response of the pinch

protection system. In this case, if the closing

force exceeds a defined threshold, the window

will only open a little.

If the switch is pulled past the resistance point

again within approx. 4 seconds, the pinch pro-

tection system will be deactivated.

Do not install any accessories in the range of

movement of the windows, as otherwise the

pinch protection system will be impaired.<

Safety switch

With the safety switch, you can prevent the rear

windows from being opened or closed via the

switches in the rear passenger area, by chil-

dren, for example. The LED lights up when this

safety feature is activated.

Always press the safety switch when chil-

dren ride in the rear, otherwise

unchecked closing of the windows could lead to

injuries.<

Glass sunroof*, electric

The glass sunroof is ready for operation with

the ignition switched on, refer to page 58.

To prevent injuries, exercise care when

closing the glass sunroof and keep it in

your field of vision until it is closed.

Always take along the remote control when you

leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for

example, operate the roof and injure them-

selves.<

Raising

Press switch.

>The closed glass sunroof is raised and the

sliding visor opens slightly.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Opening and closing

42

>The opened glass sunroof automatically

moves into the raised position. The sliding

visor remains completely open.

Do not use force to close the headliner

insert with the glass sunroof in its raised

position, otherwise the mechanism will be dam-

aged.<

Opening, closing

>Press switch back to the resistance point.

The glass sunroof and the sliding visor open

together for as long as you hold the switch

in this position.

>Press switch back past the resistance point.

The glass sunroof and the sliding visor open

automatically. Briefly press the switch again

to stop the opening movement.

In a similar manner, the glass sunroof closes

when you slide the switch forward. The sliding

visor remains open and can be closed by hand.

For information on using the convenience oper-

ation at the door lock or with the remote control,

refer to page 31 or 32.

For information on comfort closing with comfort

access, refer to page 39.

Automatic opening and closing

Press the switch past the resistance point.

The following movements are also automatic:

>When the sunroof is open, press the switch

in the lifting direction: the sunroof is raised

all the way.

>When the sunroof is raised, press the

switch in the opening direction: the sunroof

is opened all the way.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Pinch protection system

If the glass sunroof encounters resistance when

closing from roughly the center of the roof

opening or when closing from the raised posi-

tion, the closing action is interrupted and the

glass sunroof reopens a short way.

Despite the pinch protection system,

inspect the sunroof's travel path prior to

closing it, as the safety system might fail to

detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as

very thin objects, and the sunroof would con-

tinue closing.

Pressing the switch beyond the resistance

point and holding it there deactivates the pinch

protection system.<

Following interruptions in electrical

power supply

After a power loss, the sunroof may only

respond to the lift command. The system must

be initialized. BMW recommends having this

work done by your BMW center.

Moving manually

In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can

move the glass sunroof manually:

1. Fold the cover panel down, if necessary

using a screwdriver from the onboard tool

kit, refer to page 211.

2. Insert the Allen wrench supplied with the

onboard tool kit, refer to page 211, into the

opening provided. Move the glass sunroof

in the desired direction. The arrow below

indicates the rotation direction for closing.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

43

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Sports Wagon:

Panorama glass sunroof

The panorama glass sunroof is ready for opera-

tion with the ignition switched on, refer to

page 58.

To prevent injuries, exercise care when

closing the panorama glass sunroof and

keep it in your field of vision until it is closed.

Always take along the remote control when you

leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for

example, operate the roof and injure them-

selves.<

Raising, opening, closing

Press the switch or slide it in the desired direc-

tion up to the resistance point.

The sliding visor is opened:

>together with the sunroof

>slightly when the sunroof is tilted

With the sunroof closed or tilted, the sliding

visor can be opened and closed independently.

For information on using the convenience oper-

ation at the door lock or with the remote control,

refer to page 31 or 32.

For information on comfort closing with comfort

access, refer to page 39.

Ventilation setting

Press the switch:

The sunroof is raised and the sliding visor is

opened slightly.

Automatic opening and closing

Press the switch past the resistance point.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Opening and closing sunroof and

sliding visor together

Press the switch beyond the resistance point

twice consecutively.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Comfort position

Each time the panorama glass sunroof is com-

pletely opened and then closed, it stops in the

comfort position. If desired, continue the

motion following this with the switch.

In the comfort position the wind noises in the

interior are reduced.

Pinch protection system

If the panorama glass sunroof or sliding visor

encounter resistance when closing from

roughly one third of the sunroof opening or

when closing from the raised position, the clos-

ing action is interrupted and the panorama

glass sunroof and sliding visor reopen a little.

Despite the pinch protection system,

inspect the sunroof's travel path prior to

closing it, as the safety system might fail to

detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as

very thin objects, and the sunroof would con-

tinue closing.

Pressing the switch beyond the resistance

point and holding it there deactivates the pinch

protection system.<

Following interruptions in electrical

power supply

After a power loss, the sunroof may only

respond to the lift command. The system must

be initialized. BMW recommends having this

work done by your BMW center.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Opening and closing

44

Moving manually

In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can

move the roof manually:

1. Fold back the cover, using the screwdriver

from the toolkit at the points indicated if

necessary, refer to page 211.

2. Remove the Allen key from the mounting

next to the toolkit and insert it in the open-

ing provided. Move the sunroof in the

desired direction. The arrow below indi-

cates the rotation direction for closing.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

45

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Adjustments

Sitting safely

The ideal sitting position can make a vital con-

tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In the

interaction with the safety belts, the head

restraints and the airbags, the seat position

plays an important role in an accident. To

ensure that the safety systems operate with

optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to

observe the instructions contained in the fol-

lowing section.

For additional information on transporting chil-

dren safely, refer to page 54.

Airbags

Always maintain an adequate distance

between yourself and the airbags. Always

hold the steering wheel by its rim with hands at

the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions, to mini-

mize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms

in the event of airbag deployment.

No one and nothing is to come between the air-

bags and the seat occupant.

Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the

front passenger side as a storage area. Make

sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly

and does not rest feet or legs on the instrument

panel, otherwise leg injuries can occur if the

front airbag is triggered.

Make sure that occupants do not rest their head

on the side or head airbag, otherwise injuries

can occur if the airbags are triggered.<

Even if you adhere to all the instructions, inju-

ries resulting from contact with airbags cannot

be fully excluded, depending on the circum-

stances. The ignition and inflation noise may

provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi-

tive individuals. This effect is usually only tem-

porary.

For airbag locations and additional information

on airbags, refer to page 94.

Head restraints

A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the

risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.

Adjust the head restraint so that its center

is approx. at ear level. Otherwise there is

increased danger of injury in the event of an

accident.<

Head restraints, refer to page 48.

Safety belts

Before every drive, make sure that safety belts

are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Air-

bags complement the safety belt as an addi-

tional safety device, but they do not represent a

substitute.

Your vehicle is provided with five seats, which

are all equipped with a safety belt.

Never allow more than one person to

wear a single safety belt. Never allow

infants or small children to ride in a passenger's

lap. Make sure that the belt lies low around the

hips in the lap area and does not press on the

abdomen. The safety belt may not lie across the

neck, rub on sharp edges, be routed over solid

or breakable objects or be pinched. Wear the

safety belt without twisting, snugly across the

lap and shoulders, as close to the body as pos-

sible. Otherwise the belt can slip over the hips

in the lap area in a frontal impact and injure the

abdomen. Avoid wearing clothing that prevents

the belt from fitting properly and pull the belt in

the upper body area periodically to readjust the

tension, in order to avoid a reduction in the

restraint of the safety belt.

Sports Wagon: if the middle safety belt in the

rear is used, the larger seatback half must be

locked, refer to page 117, otherwise the middle

safety belt has no restraining action.<

Safety belts, refer to page 49.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Adjustments

46

Seats

Note before adjusting

Never attempt to adjust your seat while

the vehicle is moving. The seat could

respond with unexpected movement, and the

ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

Also on the passenger side, do not incline the

backrest too far to the rear while the vehicle is

being driven, otherwise there is a danger in the

event of an accident of sliding under the safety

belt, eliminating the protection normally pro-

vided by the belt.<

Please observe the information on damage to

safety belts provided on page 50 and the infor-

mation on the active front

head restraints

*

on

page 49.

Seat adjustment

To ensure that the safety systems con-

tinue to provide optimized protection,

please observe the adjustment instructions on

page 45.<

1Longitudinal direction

2Height

3Angle

4Backrest

Adjusting comfort seat*

In this seat, you can also adjust:

1Backrest width

2Shoulder support

3Thigh support

4Lumbar support

*

, see below

Shoulder support: the adjustable upper back-

rest also supports the back in the shoulder

region. This provides a relaxed driving position

and helps relieve stress on the shoulder mus-

cles.

Adjusting lumbar support*

You can also adjust the contour of the backrest

to obtain additional support in the lumbar

region.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

47

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

The upper hips and spinal column receive sup-

plementary support to help you maintain a

relaxed, upright sitting position.

>Increase or decrease curvature: push

switch forward or back.

>Shift curvature up or down: push switch up

or down.

Adjusting active backrest width*

First set a comfortable backrest width, see

above. Based on the backrest width set, the lat-

eral support is automatically adapted to the cur-

rent driving situation.

The adaptation of the backrest width and the

speed of the adjustment vary depending on the

program. You can select from among three pro-

grams from comfort to sport.

Press program button once:

>"Comfort" program: one LED

>"Normal" program: two LEDs

>"Sport" program: three LEDs

To switch off: press button longer.

Easy entry/exit*

To facilitate entry and exit, the backrest width

temporarily opens all the way.

Seat, mirror and steering

wheel memory*

You can store and request two different posi-

tions for the driver's seat and passenger seat

*

,

external rearview mirrors, and steering wheel.

The adjustment of the lumbar support is not

stored in the memory.

Storing

1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition, refer

to page 58.

2. Set the desired seat, exterior mirror and

steering wheel positions.

3. Press the button:

The LED in the button lights up.

4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2:

The LED goes out.

Requesting

Do not request a position from the mem-

ory while the vehicle is moving. There is a

risk of accident from unexpected movement of

the seat or steering wheel.<

Convenience mode

1. Open the driver's door after unlocking or

switch on radio readiness.

2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1

or 2.

The system immediately cancels the

adjustment procedure when you briefly

press one of the seat adjustment buttons or

one of the memory buttons.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Adjustments

48

Safety feature

1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni-

tion on or off.

2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2

and maintain pressure until the adjustment

process has been completed.

If the button was pressed inadvertently:

press the button again; the LED goes out.

Activating with remote control

The last positions of the driver's seat, the exter-

nal rearview mirrors, and steering wheel are

stored for the remote key currently in use.

You can choose when the position is requested:

>Request when unlocking vehicle

>Request when opening driver's door

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the

controller.

4. Select "Door locks" and press the control-

ler.

5. Select "Central locking" and press the con-

troller.

6. Select "Last seat pos." and press the con-

troller.

7. Select "After unlocking" or "After door

opened".

8. Press the controller.

To cancel the request:

Select "Deactivated" and press the controller.

When using this feature, always make

sure that the footwell behind the driver's

seat is empty and unobstructed. Failure to do

so could cause injury to persons or damage to

objects behind the seat as a result of a rearward

movement of the seat.<

Head restraints

A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the

risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.

Adjust the head restraint so that its center

is approx. at ear level. Otherwise there is

increased danger of injury in the event of an

accident.<

Front seats: height adjustment

You can adjust the height of the head restraints

electrically.

Front seats: angle adjustment

Swivel the head restraint.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

49

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

With the comfort seat, use the shoulder support

to set the distance to the back of the head.

Adjusting side extensions in comfort

seat

You can fold the side extensions on the head

restraint forward for increased lateral support in

the resting position.

Front head restraints, active*

The comfort seats are equipped with an active

head restraint.

In the event of a rear-end collision of sufficient

severity, the active head restraint reduces the

distance to the head.

Do not use seat or head restraint covers

and do not hand objects, e.g. clothes

hangers, on the head restraints or attach any

accessories to the seat or head restraint. Other-

wise the protective function of the active head

restraints will be impaired and personal safety

endangered.<

Rear seats: height adjustment

>To raise: pull up.

>To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and

push the head restraint downward.

Safety belts

To ensure that the safety systems con-

tinue to provide optimized protection,

please observe the adjustment instructions on

page 45.<

Before every drive, make sure that safety belts

are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Air-

bags complement the safety belt as an addi-

tional safety device, but they do not represent a

substitute.

Fastening

Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in

the belt buckle.

Safety belt memory for driver's seat

and passenger seat*

The indicator lamp lights up and a sig-

nal sounds. A message also appears on

the Control Display. Please check

whether the safety belt is correctly positioned.

The safety belt memory is operative at speeds

above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be acti-

vated if objects are placed on the passenger

seat.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Adjustments

50

Releasing

1. Grasp the belt firmly.

2. Press the red button in the buckle.

3. Guide the belt into its reel.

The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be

correct for adult seat occupants of every build if

the seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page 46.

The two rear safety belt buckles integrated into

the rear seat are for passengers sitting on the

left and right. The belt buckle embossed with

the word CENTER is intended exclusively for

use by passengers riding in the center position.

Damage to safety belts

In the event of loads caused by accidents

or other damage: replace the belt system

including the safety belt tensioner and any child

restraint systems, and have the belt anchor

points checked. Only have this work carried out

at a BMW center or at a workshop that works

according to BMW repair procedures with cor-

respondingly trained personnel. Otherwise cor-

rect operation of this safety equipment is not

guaranteed.<

Heated seats*

Front

The temperature setting progresses one step

through its control sequence each time you

press the button. The maximum temperature is

supplied when three LEDs are lit.

To switch off: press the button longer.

Temperature distribution

The heat output can be distributed variously in

the seat cushion and the backrest.

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-

mate".

3. Select "Seat heater distribution" and press

the controller.

4. Move the controller to the left or right to

select "Driver" or "Passenger".

5. Turn the controller. The adjustment is

applied; the field can be changed.

Rear

Operation as for front seat heating; two temper-

ature settings.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

51

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Active seat ventilation*

The system progresses one step through the

control sequence each time you press the but-

ton.

To switch off: press the button longer.

The highest position with three LEDs is

used for rapid cooling, e.g. when the vehi-

cle has gotten heated up. After a short time, the

system is automatically switched down one

position in order to prevent excessive cooling.<

Active seat*

The seat cushion is actively varied by alter-

nately raising and lowering the right and left half

of the seat cushion. This reduces muscular ten-

sion and fatigue to help prevent lower back

pain.

Press the button to switch on; the LED lights

up.

If you switch off the active seat, it can take up

to 1 minute before the two halves of the seat

cushion have returned to their initial position.

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

The mirror on the passenger's side is

more curved than the driver's mirror.

Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than

they appear. Do not estimate the distance of

following traffic based on what you see in the

mirrors, otherwise there is an increased acci-

dent risk.<

1Adjustments

2Switching to the other mirror or to the auto-

matic parking function

Storing the mirror positions, refer to Seat, mir-

ror and steering wheel memory on page 47.

Manual adjustment

You can also adjust the mirrors manually by

pressing against the outer edges of their mirror

glass.

Folding mirrors in and out

To prevent the exterior mirrors on this

vehicle from being damaged, always fold

them in by hand before entering an automatic

car wash.<

Automatic heating

Below a certain outdoor temperature, both

exterior mirrors are automatically heated when

the motor is running or the ignition is switched

on.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Adjustments

52

Tilting down passenger-side exterior

mirror – automatic parking function*

Activating

1. Slide switch into the driver's side mirror

position, arrow 1.

2. Engage reverse gear or selector lever posi-

tion R.

The mirror glass tilts downward somewhat

on the passenger's side. This allows the

driver to see the area immediately adjacent

to the vehicle – such as a curb – when park-

ing, etc.

Deactivating

Slide switch into the passenger side mirror

position, arrow 2.

Interior rearview mirror

To reduce the dazzle effect of following vehi-

cles at night, turn the knob.

Automatically dimming

*

mirrors

,

refer to

page 125.

Steering wheel

Adjustments

Do not adjust the steering wheel while the

vehicle is moving. There is a risk of acci-

dent as the result of unexpected movement.<

The steering wheel can be adjusted in four

directions.

Storing steering wheel positions, refer to Seat,

mirror and steering wheel memory on page 47.

Electric steering wheel lock

The steering wheel locks or unlocks automati-

cally when the remote control is removed or

inserted, refer to page 58.

Easy entry/exit*

To facilitate entry and exit, the steering wheel

temporarily moves into the uppermost position.

Steering wheel heater*

Press the button with the ignition switched on.

When the steering wheel heater is operating,

the LED in the button lights up.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

53

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Programmable buttons* on steering

wheel

You can program the buttons individually.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the

controller.

4. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the

controller until "Steering wheel buttons" is

selected and press the controller.

A list of different functions appears:

>"Navigation voice instructions"

Voice instructions for the navigation

system

*

>"Air recirculation on / off"

Permanently shutting off outside air,

refer to AUC Automatic recirculated air

control on page 108

>"Mute on / off"

Mutes the audio sources

>"Monitor on / off"

Switches the Control Display on/off

>"Telephone list"

*

Display/hide phone book or last list of

stored phone numbers

>"HDC on / off"

Switches HDC Hill Descent Control

*

on/

off

>"Next entertainment source"

Changes audio source

>"Night Vision on / off"

Switches BMW Night Vision

*

on/off

5. Select the desired function and press the

controller.

6. Select the button if necessary and press the

controller.

You can operate the selected function using the

corresponding button.

Operating function

Press the corresponding button on the steering

wheel.

If you have programmed "Navigation voice

instructions" for one of the buttons:

>To switch voice instructions on/off:

Hold the button down.

>To repeat the last voice instruction:

Press the button.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Transporting children safely

54

Transporting children safely

The right place for children

Do not leave children unattended in the

vehicle, otherwise they could endanger

themselves and other persons, e.g. by opening

the doors.<

Children always in the rear

Accident research shows that the safest place

for children is on the back seat.

Children younger than 13 years of age or

with a height under 5 ft/150 cm may only

be transported in the rear in child restraint sys-

tems which correspond to the age, weight and

height of the child. Otherwise there is an

increased danger of injury in an accident.<

Children 13 years of age or older must wear a

safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint

system can no longer be used due to their age,

size and weight.

With the exception of the driver's seat, all seats

in your BMW comply with the recommenda-

tions of the standard SAE J1819 for the safe

securing of child restraint systems in motor

vehicles.

Exception for front passenger seat

Should it be necessary to use a child

restraint system on the front passenger

seat, the front and side airbag on the passenger

side must be deactivated. Otherwise, there is

an increased risk of injury for the child if the air-

bags are triggered, even with a child restraint

system. Your BMW center will be glad to advise

you.<

For more information on automatic deactivation

of the front passenger airbags, refer to page 95.

Installing child restraint

systems

Observe the child restraint system manu-

facturer's instructions for selection,

installation and use of the child restraint sys-

tems. Otherwise the degree of protection may

be reduced.<

Backrest width* on front passenger

seat

Before mounting a child restraint system

on the front passenger seat, the backrest

width adjustment must be open completely.

After mounting the child's seat, no memory

position may be called up and the active back-

rest width adjustment must be deactivated,

otherwise the stability of the child's seat on the

front passenger seat is limited.<

1. After unlocking the vehicle, place on the

front passenger seat and close the door to

call up the memory position.

2. Completely open the backrest width adjust-

ment, refer to page 46.

3. Deactivate active backrest width adjust-

ment, refer to page 47.

4. Install child's seat.

Child seat security

All rear safety belts and the safety belt for the

front passenger can be locked against pulling

out to secure child restraint systems.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

55

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Locking safety belt

1. Secure the child restraint system with the

belt.

2. Pull out the belt webbing completely.

3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and

pull taut against the child restraint system.

The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking safety belt

1. Open the belt buckle.

2. Remove the child restraint system.

3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com-

pletely.

Child restraint system with tether strap

Sedan

There are three additional mounting points for

child restraint systems with a tether strap, refer

to arrows. Fold the corresponding mounting

point upward before using.

Sports Wagon

Only use the teather-strap mounting

points to secure child restraint systems,

as otherwise the mounting points could be

damaged.<

Three are three additional mounting points for

child restraint systems with a tether strap, refer

to arrows, under covers in the cargo area floor.

Before using, remove the corresponding cover

with a screwdriver.

Placement of tether strap

Outer seats:

1. Pull the head restraint upward.

2. Guide the tether strap through the bracket

of the head restraint.

3. Slide the head restraint into the bottom

position.

4. Hook in the tether strap on the mounting

point.

Center seat:

1. Fold the center armrest somewhat toward

the front.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Transporting children safely

56

2. Guide the tether strap through the opening.

3. Fold back the center armrest.

4. Hook in the tether strap on the mounting

point.

On the Sports Wagon, also guide the tether

strap between the backrest and the roll-up

cover on all rear seats.

LATCH child-restraint fixing system

LATCH: Lower Anchor and Tethers for CHil-

dren.

To attach a LATCH child's seat, follow the

operating and safety instructions of the

child's seat manufacturer.<

Sedan: rear seats

The mountings for the LATCH child's seat fix-

ing system are located at the points marked

with the arrows. They are not visible from the

outside.

Before attaching the LATCH child's seat, pull

the belt away from the region of the child-

restraint fixing system.

Sedan: rear seats with through-loading

system*

The anchorage points for the LATCH child-

restraint fixing system are located behind the

indicated protective caps. Before attaching the

child's seat, remove the protective caps and

pull the belt out of the area of the child-restraint

fixing system.

Sports Wagon: rear seats

The mountings for mounting the LATCH child-

restraint fixing system are located behind the

indicated protective caps and are covered again

after the child's seat is removed.

Before attaching the LATCH child's seat, pull

the belt away from the region of the child-

restraint fixing system.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

57

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

On trips

If the vehicle is equipped with rear side

airbags, make sure that children do not

lean out of the child's seat towards the door

panels. Otherwise injuries can be caused if the

side airbags are triggered.<

Child-safety locks for rear doors

Slide down the safety lever on the rear doors:

the door can now be opened from the outside

only.

Safety switch for power windows

Always press the safety switch for the power

windows, refer to page 41, when children are

riding in the rear of the vehicle.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Driving

58

Driving

Ignition lock

Insert the remote control as far as possible into

the ignition lock.

>Radio readiness switches on.

Some current consumers are ready for

operation.

>The electric steering-wheel lock audibly

unlocks.

Before moving the vehicle, insert the

remote control into the ignition lock;

otherwise, the electric steering-wheel lock will

not be unlocked and the vehicle cannot be

steered.<

Removing remote control from ignition

lock

Briefly press in the remote control; it is pushed

out somewhat.

>The ignition is switched off if it was still

switched on.

>The electric steering-wheel lock audibly

locks.

Automatic transmission

The remote control can only be removed when

the selector lever position P is selected: inter-

lock.

Start/Stop button

Briefly pressing the Start/Stop button several

times switches the radio readiness or the igni-

tion on and off.

Briefly pressing the Start/Stop button

with the brake or clutch pedal depressed

starts the engine.<

Radio readiness

Some current consumers are ready for opera-

tion. The time and outside temperature are dis-

played in the instrument cluster.

Radio readiness is automatically switched off:

>when the remote control is removed from

the ignition lock

>with comfort access

*

by touching the sen-

sitive surface on the door handle, refer to

Locking on page 39

Ignition on

All current consumers are ready for operation.

The odometer and the trip odometer are dis-

played in the instrument cluster, refer to

page 74.

Please switch off the ignition and the cur-

rent consumers which are not required

when the engine is not running to save the bat-

tery.<

Radio readiness and ignition off

All indicator and warning lamps in the instru-

ment cluster go out.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

59

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Starting engine

Do not run the engine in closed rooms,

otherwise the inhaling of toxic exhaust

gases can cause unconsciousness and death.

The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,

an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas.

Never leave an unattended vehicle with the

engine running, as such a vehicle represents a

potential safety hazard.

Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run-

ning, set the selector lever to the idling or the

P position and set the handbrake, otherwise the

vehicle can begin to roll.<

When starting the engine, do not press the

accelerator pedal.

Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it

running while the vehicle remains stationary.

Instead, begin to drive immediately at a moder-

ate engine speed.

Do not press either the brake or the clutch

pedal as long as you do not want to start

the engine. The engine starts immediately

when you briefly press the Start/Stop button

and press the brake pedal with an automatic

transmission

*

or the clutch pedal with a manual

transmission.<

Manual transmission

1. Apply the handbrake.

2. Depress the clutch pedal and select the

idling position.

3. Briefly press Start/Stop button.

The system responds by automatically engag-

ing the starter for a certain period and automat-

ically disengaging it as soon as the engine

starts.

Automatic transmission*

1. Depress brake pedal.

2. Place selector lever in position P or N.

3. Briefly press Start/Stop button.

The system responds by automatically engag-

ing the starter for a certain period and automat-

ically disengaging it as soon as the engine

starts.

SMG Sequential Manual

Transmission*

1. Depress brake pedal.

2. Engage selector lever position N and make

sure that this position is also indicated in

instrument cluster.

3. Briefly press Start/Stop button.

The system responds by automatically engag-

ing the starter for a certain period and automat-

ically disengaging it as soon as the engine

starts.

If the engine fails to start, depress the

brake pedal and press the selector lever

to the right then engage the position N. Watch

the display in the instrument cluster while doing

so.<

Special starting conditions

Depress the accelerator pedal half way when

starting the engine in the following situations:

>The engine fails to start on the first attempt,

e.g. if it is very hot or cold.

>The engine is started at very low tempera-

tures, below approx. +57/–156, at high

altitudes, over approx. 3,300 ft/1,000 m.

Avoid frequent starting in quick succes-

sion or repeated starting attempts in

which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the

fuel is not burned or inadequately burned and

there is a danger of overheating and damaging

the catalytic converter.<

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Driving

60

Switching off engine

Do not remove the remote control from

the ignition lock while the vehicle is roll-

ing, otherwise the steering wheel lock would

engage while steering.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

remote control with you.

When parking on a downhill incline, apply the

handbrake, as otherwise the vehicle could roll

away.<

Manual transmission

1. Briefly press the Start/Stop button with the

vehicle stopped.

2. Shift into first gear or reverse.

3. Apply the handbrake.

SMG Sequential Manual

Transmission*

1. Apply the handbrake.

2. Engage a driving position.

3. Briefly press the Start/Stop button.

If the position N is engaged when the

engine is switched off, this is pointed out

visually and acoustically.

Automatic transmission*

1. Select the selector lever position P with the

vehicle stopped.

2. Briefly press the Start/Stop button.

Handbrake

The handbrake is primarily intended to prevent

the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes

the rear wheels.

Indicator lamp

The indicator lamp lights up, and a sig-

nal also sounds when starting off. The

handbrake is applied.

Indicator lamp for Canadian models.

Applying

The lever locks in position automatically.

Releasing

Pull slightly upwards, press the button and

lower the lever.

If exceptional circumstances should

make it necessary to engage the hand-

brake while the vehicle is in motion, do not pull it

too strongly. In doing so, continuously press the

button of the handbrake lever. Otherwise

excessive pressure can lead to the rear wheels

locking up and loss of traction – fishtailing – at

the rear axle.<

To prevent corrosion and one-sided brak-

ing action, occasionally apply the hand-

brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming

to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable.

The brake lamps do not light up when the hand-

brake is applied.<

Manual transmission

While shifting in the 5th/6th gear lane,

press the gearshift lever toward the right,

otherwise accidental shifting into the 3rd or 4th

gear could result in engine damage.<

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

61

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Reverse gear

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

When pressing the gearshift lever to the left,

overcome some resistance.

SMG Sequential Manual

Transmission*

The concept

The SMG Sequential Manual Transmission is

an automated manual transmission in which an

electrohydraulic system handles the clutching

and gear changes.

The SMG is operated with the selector lever

and two shift paddles on the steering wheel.

It offers you the following functions:

>Optional manual or automatic operation:

Sequential mode or Drive mode

>You have a choice of two driving programs:

Normal or Sport, refer to Dynamic Driving

Control page 62

>Automatic downshifting and prevention of

incorrect shifting even in Sequential opera-

tion

>Acceleration assistant, refer to page 63.

Selector lever positions

>R: Reverse gear

>N: Neutral

>One-touch functions for Sequential mode:

+: manual upshifting

–: manual downshifting

>D: activate/deactivate the Drive mode

The transmission automatically shifts

into N if the driver's door is opened with

the engine running and neither the pedals, the

shift paddles nor the selector lever are oper-

ated.

This is signaled by an acoustic signal and the

flashing display N in the instrument cluster; a

message appears on the Control Display.<

Gear display

R N 1 to 6

The currently engaged gear is displayed, pre-

ceded by a D in Drive mode.

It is only possible to recognize whether

the desired selector lever position is

engaged with this display.<

Shiftlock

Press the brake pedal before shifting out of N;

the shift command will not be executed unless

the brake is applied.

R Reverse

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

Sequential mode

After every engine start, as soon as the selector

lever is pushed to the right and the brake pedal

is pressed, the Sequential mode is activated.

You can shift up and down using the shifting

paddles or the selector lever. You do not need

to remove your foot from the accelerator to do

so.

It is also possible to start off in second gear, e.g.

in slippery conditions.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Driving

62

In the following situations, SMG thinks for you:

>Upshifts and downshifts are executed only

when they will result in a plausible combina-

tion of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for

example, a downshift that would cause the

engine to overrev will not be executed by

the system.

>When the vehicle is stationary, the trans-

mission automatically downshifts into first

gear.

>Shortly before dropping below a gear-

dependent minimum speed, the transmis-

sion downshifts automatically even without

your intervention.

D Drive mode

In the Drive mode, all forward gears are shifted

automatically.

Shifting from Sequential mode to Drive mode:

press selector lever to the right toward D.

Kick-down: for rapid acceleration, e.g. when

passing, press the accelerator pedal as far

down as it will go. You achieve maximum accel-

eration.

To switch back into the Sequential mode: press

selector lever to the right again toward D or shift

using the shifting paddles or the selector lever.

Start off quickly on slopes. Do not hold

the vehicle on a hill by pressing the accel-

erator, but apply the handbrake instead. Other-

wise overheating can occur in the transmission

region.<

Gear changes

Using selector lever

>To upshift, pull the selector lever back.

>To downshift, push the selector lever for-

ward.

Using shift paddles on steering wheel

>To upshift, pull one of the shift paddles.

>To downshift, press.

Dynamic Driving Control

The Dynamic Driving Control makes it possible

for your BMW to react in an even more perfor-

mance-oriented manner at the push of a button:

>The engine responds more spontaneously

to accelerator pedal movements.

>Gearshifts are faster.

>The engine speed range is used optimally in

the Drive mode.

>Cruise control

*

:

The stored speed is reached more quickly

when it is requested.

Activating system

Press the SPORT button.

The LED in the button lights up and SPORT is

displayed in the instrument cluster.

Deactivating system

Press the SPORT button again.

The LED in the button and SPORT in the instru-

ment cluster go out.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

63

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Acceleration assistant

The acceleration assistant enables optimized

vehicle acceleration at racing car level on road

surfaces with good adhesion when starting off.

Do not use the acceleration assistant too

often, otherwise components will wear

prematurely.<

1. Activate the Dynamic Driving Control.

2. Deactivate DSC, refer to page 87.

3. Quickly press accelerator pedal all the way

down: kick-down. The ideal starting-off

engine speed is set.

To maintain the vehicle stability, reacti-

vate DSC afterward.<

Automatic transmission with

Steptronic*

In addition to fully automatic operation, you can

also manually shift with the Steptronic, refer to

page 64.

Selector lever positions

P R N D M/S + –

Displays in instrument cluster

P R N D DS M1 to M6

The selector lever position is indicated, and in

the manual mode the gear currently engaged.

Changing selector lever positions

>Only move the selector lever from posi-

tion P when the engine is running: interlock.

>With the vehicle stopped, press the brake

before shifting out of P or N, otherwise the

selector lever is blocked: shiftlock.

To prevent the vehicle from creeping

after you select a driving position,

maintain pressure on the brake pedal until

you are ready to start.<

A lock prevents accidentally shifting into the

selector lever positions R and P. To cancel the

lock, press the button on the front of the selec-

tor lever, refer to arrow.

P Park

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

The rear wheels are locked.

R Reverse

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

N Neutral

Can, for example, be engaged in automatic car

washes. The vehicle can roll.

D Drive, automatic position

Position for normal vehicle operation. All for-

ward gears are available.

Under normal operating conditions, the fuel

consumption is lowest when driving in posi-

tion D.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Driving

64

Kick-down

The kick-down mode provides maximum accel-

eration: press the accelerator pedal beyond the

full-throttle resistance point.

Sport program and

manual operation M/S

Move selector lever from position D toward the

left into the M/S shifting slot:

The sport program is activated and DS is dis-

played in the instrument cluster. This position is

recommended for a performance-oriented driv-

ing style.

When the selector lever is pressed forward or

back, the manual mode is activated and the

Steptronic shifts the gear. The instrument clus-

ter shows M1 through M6.

Upshifts and downshifts are executed only

when they will result in a plausible combination

of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example,

a downshift that would cause the engine to

overrev will not be executed by the system. The

selected gear is briefly displayed in the instru-

ment cluster, followed by the current gear.

To use the automatic function again, move the

selector lever to the right into position D.

Deactivating selector lever interlock

If the selector lever is blocked in the position P

even though the button on the selector lever is

pressed, the selector lever interlock can be

deactivated:

1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.

2. Pull the sleeve over the selector lever.

3. Press the lever at the point marked in red

with the screwdriver from the onboard tool-

kit, refer to page 211, and move the selector

lever into the desired position.

Turn signals/

headlamp flasher

1High beams

2Headlamp flasher

3Turn signals

Using turn signals

Press the lever beyond the resistance point.

To turn off manually, press the lever to the

resistance point.

Atypically rapid flashing of the indicator

lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb

needs to be replaced.<

Signaling briefly

Press lever to resistance point and hold for as

long as you wish to signal.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

65

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Triple turn signal activation

Press the lever to the resistance point; the turn

signal flashes three times.

You can activate or deactivate this function.

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the

controller.

4. Select "Lighting" and press the controller.

5. Select "Triple turn signal activation" and

press the controller.

Triple turn signaling is activated.

Wiper system

1Switching on wipers

2Switching off wipers or brief wipe

3Activating/deactivating rain sensor

4Cleaning windshield, headlamps and

BMW Night Vision camera

*

5Adjusting rain sensor

sensitivity level

Switching on wipers

Pull the lever upward, arrow 1.

The lever automatically returns to its initial posi-

tion when released.

Normal wiper speed

Press once.

The system reverts to operation in the intermit-

tent mode when the vehicle is stationary.

Fast wiper speed

Press twice or press beyond the resistance

point.

The system reverts to normal speed when the

vehicle is stationary.

Rain sensor

The wiper operation is controlled automatically

as a function of the rain intensity. The rain sen-

sor is located on the windshield, directly in front

of the interior rearview mirror.

Activating rain sensor

Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the but-

ton lights up.

Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level

Turn the knurled wheel 5.

Deactivating rain sensor

Press the button again, arrow 3. The LED goes

out.

Deactivate the rain sensor when passing

through an automatic car wash. Failure to

do so could result in damage caused by undes-

ired wiper activation.<

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Driving

66

Cleaning windshield, headlamps* and

BMW Night Vision camera*

Pull the lever, arrow 4.

The system sprays washer fluid against the

windshield and activates the wipers for a brief

period.

With the vehicle lighting switched on, the head-

lamps and the BMW Night Vision camera are

also cleaned simultaneously at suitable inter-

vals.

Do not use the washers if there is any

danger that the fluid will freeze on the

windshield. If you do so, your vision could be

obscured. To avoid freezing, use a washer fluid

antifreeze, refer to Washer fluid. Do not use

washing mechanisms when the washer fluid

reservoir is empty, otherwise you will damage

the washer pump.<

Windshield washer nozzles

Both windshield washer nozzles are automati-

cally heated with the engine running or the igni-

tion switched on.

Sports Wagon:

Rear window wiper

1Intermittent mode. When reverse gear is

engaged, continuous operation is switched

on automatically

2Cleaning the rear window

Do not use washing mechanisms when

the washer fluid reservoir is empty, other-

wise you will damage the washer pump.<

Washer fluid

Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable.

Always keep it well away from sparks and

open flames, and store it in tightly closed con-

tainers well out of the reach of children. Always

observe the instructions for use provided on the

containers.<

Washer fluid reservoir

All washer jets are supplied from one reservoir.

Fill with water and – if required – with a washer

antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom-

mendations.

In order to maintain the mixture ratio, mix

the washer fluid before filling.<

Capacity

Sedan:

approx. 3.2 US quarts/3 liters, with headlamp

washer system

*

approx. 5.3USquarts/5liters.

Sports Wagon: approx. 5.3 US quarts/5 liters.

Cruise control*

The concept

The cruise control is available for use at speeds

of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h and higher. The

vehicle stores and maintains the speed that you

set using the lever mounted on the steering col-

umn.

Do not use the cruise control under driv-

ing conditions that do not permit a con-

stant speed, e.g. when driving on winding

roads, in heavy traffic or in poor road conditions

such as snow, rain, ice, and loose road surface.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

67

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Otherwise you could loose control of the vehi-

cle and cause an accident.<

One lever for all functions

1Maintaining speed, storing speed, and

accelerating

2Maintaining speed, storing speed, and

decelerating

3Interrupting cruise control

4Resuming stored speed

Maintaining speed, storing speed,

and accelerating

Press lever to resistance point, arrow 1:

The speed currently being driven is maintained

and stored. The display 1 in the speedometer,

see below, indicates this regulated speed.

Every time you press the lever, the vehicle's

speed increases by roughly 1 mph/1 km/h.

Press lever to resistance point for a longer time:

The vehicle accelerates without pressure on

the accelerator pedal. The system maintains

and stores your current speed as soon as you

release the lever.

Press the lever beyond the resistance point:

increase speed by 5 mph/10 km/h.

If, on a downhill grade, the engine's braking

effect is not sufficient, the controlled speed can

be exceeded. Speed can drop on uphill grades if

the engine output is insufficient.

Maintaining speed, storing speed, and

decelerating

Pull the lever, arrow 2:

Functions are the same as 1, only the vehicle

speed is reduced.

Interrupting cruise control

Press the lever up or down, arrow 3.

In addition, cruise control is automatically deac-

tivated:

>When the brakes are applied

>When the clutch pedal is depressed or the

automatic transmission/SMG is shifted into

the N position

>When the DSC comes on

Resuming stored speed

Press button 4:

The stored speed is resumed and maintained.

Deactivating system

When the ignition is switched off, the system is

deactivated and the stored speed is deleted.

Displays in instrument cluster

1Stored desired speed

2Selected desired speed appears briefly

Active cruise control*

The concept

With active cruise control, you can select a

desired speed which is not only automatically

maintained when driving on open roadways, but

also varied to maintain a selected distance set-

ting as slower traffic is encountered.

Active cruise control is a technological advance

over the familiar cruise control and is a welcome

relief from the constant adjustment of speed

that can accompany driving in traffic on free-

ways or other high-speed thoroughfares.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Driving

68

Especially on longer trips, the system can

reduce fatigue and tension, while increasing

your enjoyment of driving. Please use it safely

and responsibly.

In addition to holding a steady cruising speed,

if you encounter slower vehicles ahead, active

cruise control will, within the scope of given

possibilities, adjust your vehicle's speed auto-

matically so that you can flow with the traffic

without having to make constant adjustments.

If, for example, while cruising at the selected

speed, you begin to approach a slower vehicle

ahead of you in the same lane, the system will

reduce your vehicle's speed to the same as that

of the vehicle ahead to maintain your selected

distance setting between your vehicle and the

vehicle ahead. You can vary the distance, which

is additionally speed-dependent. Based on

your selected distance setting, the system

automatically decreases the throttle setting and

lightly applies the brakes if necessary. The vehi-

cle brake lamps will automatically illuminate to

signal a following driver to take action. In addi-

tion, it may be necessary for the vehicle or the

driver to downshift, depending on the kind of

transmission your vehicle is equipped with, to

maintain the distance setting selected. If the

vehicle ahead speeds up or when the lane

ahead becomes clear, your vehicle will acceler-

ate to the speed you have selected by increas-

ing the throttle setting and shifting gears auto-

matically or by the driver as needed. Your

selected speed will be held when driving down-

hill, too.

Active cruise control is not and must not

be used as a collision avoidance/warning

system.<

Since this active cruise control system is

a new technology and operates differ-

ently from conventional cruise control systems

which you may be accustomed to, you are

strongly urged to read all of the pages relating

to this system before use. Pay special attention

to the information contained in the Things to

know about active cruise control section begin-

ning on page 71.<

Professional navigation system*

If a navigation DVD is in the drive, refer to

page 132, the system adjusts the accelerating

and braking behavior of the vehicle to the road

you are driving on.

To ensure that the system is informed of

the current course of the road, always use

the latest navigation DVD if possible.<

When the vehicle position is unknown, e.g.

when you leave the map area, this influence of

the navigation system is not available.

Brake pedal feel

>When the system brakes and you also

depress the brake pedal, a somewhat differ-

ent braking feeling results.

>Any noises produced during automatic

braking are normal.

Manual transmission

You can shift with the cruise control activated.

Shifting information is provided or the system

deactivates itself if you drive at very high or very

low engine speeds for a longer period.

SMG

In the Sequential mode, shifting information is

provided or the system deactivates itself if you

drive at very high engine speeds for a longer

period.

In the Drive mode the SMG acts similarly to an

automatic transmission in the D position.

Operating active cruise control

1Store and increase desired speed

2Store and decrease desired speed

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

69

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

3Deactivate system, refer to page 70

4Resume stored desired speed and dis-

tance, refer to page 70

5Select distance to vehicle driving ahead,

refer to page 69

Maintaining current speed

Briefly press lever, arrow 1, or briefly pull lever,

arrow 2, at a driving speed of more than approx.

20 mph or 30 km/h.

The speed currently being driven is stored and

maintained. It is indicated on the speedometer

and briefly in the instrument cluster.

Selecting desired speed

Adjust your desired speed to the traffic

conditions and remain ready to brake at

all times, otherwise accidents can occur.<

The desired speed can drop on uphill grades if

the engine output is insufficient.

Increasing in steps

Briefly press the lever repeatedly up to the

resistance point or beyond, arrow 1, until the

desired speed is displayed.

>Each time the lever is briefly pressed up to

the resistance point, the desired speed

increases by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.

>Each time the lever is briefly pressed

beyond the resistance point, the desired

speed is increased by a maximum of 5 mph

or 10 km/h until the maximum speed of

110mph or 180km/h is reached.

The speed then displayed is stored and

reached on a clear road.

Decreasing in steps

Repeatedly pull the lever up to the resistance

point or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired

speed is displayed.

>Each time the lever is pulled up to the resis-

tance point, the desired speed decreases

by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.

>Each time the lever is pulled beyond the

resistance point, the desired speed is

decreased by a maximum of 5 mph or

10 km/h until the minimum speed of

20 mph or 30 km/h is reached.

The speed then displayed is stored and

reached on a clear road.

Select distance

>Rotary switch downward:

Increase distance.

>Rotary switch upward:

Decrease distance.

The selected distance is displayed in the instru-

ment cluster.

Distance 1

Distance 2

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Driving

70

Use good judgment to select the appro-

priate following distance given road con-

ditions, traffic, applicable laws and driving rec-

ommendations for a safe following distance.<

Deactivate system

Press the lever up or down. The displays in the

instrument cluster disappear.

You also deactivate the system when you

brake, shift very slowly or into neutral, or

engage the selector lever position N. In addi-

tion, the system is deactivated automatically:

>When you activate DTC Dynamic Traction

Control

>When you deactivate DSC Dynamic Stabil-

ity Control

>When the system does not recognize any

objects for a longer time, e.g. on infre-

quently traveled roads without a shoulder or

guard rails, or if the radar sensor is covered

with dirt, refer to page 71

>When the speed is reduced to below

20 mph/30 km/h due to a traffic situation

The system deactivates automatically

when the speed is set to below 20 mph/

30 km/h. A signal sounds and a message

appears on the Control Display. The active

intervention of the driver is required, otherwise

accidents can occur.<

Resume stored desired speed and

distance

Press button 4.

The displays appear in the instrument cluster.

When you switch off the ignition, the stored

desired speed is deleted.

Displays in instrument cluster

1Stored desired speed

2Lights up yellow: vehicle driving ahead is

detected

Flashes red, a signal sounds: the system

cannot establish the distance, apply the

brakes yourself

Flashes yellow: driving stability control sys-

tems intervene, the active cruise control is

deactivated

3Selected distance to vehicle driving ahead:

lights up as soon as the system is activated

4Selected desired speed appears briefly

If the display ACC --- mph/km/h briefly

appears in the instrument cluster, it might

be that conditions necessary for operation are

not currently being met. To call up Check Con-

trol messages, refer to page 79.<

Distance 3

This distance is set when the sys-

tem is used for the first time after

starting the engine.

Distance 4

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

71

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Warning lamps

The display 2 flashes red and a sig-

nal sounds.

The system requests that you

intervene by braking or with an

evasive maneuver. The active

cruise control cannot automatically restore the

distance to the vehicle driving ahead.

However, this display cannot relieve the driver

of the responsibility for adjusting the desired

speed and driving style to the traffic conditions.

The display 2 flashes yellow.

Automatic intervention by ABS or

DSC. The active cruise control

intervenes by braking until you

take over actively.

Radar sensor

Heavy rain, dirt, snow or ice can restrict the

detection of vehicles driving ahead. If neces-

sary, clean the front radar sensor under the

bumper. Exercise particular care when remov-

ing snow and ice.

If the sensor is not aligned properly, the active

cruise control cannot be activated.

Things to know about active cruise control

As with conventional cruise control sys-

tems, active cruise control in no way

diminishes or substitutes for the driver's own

personal responsibility, alertness and aware-

ness in adjusting speed, braking or otherwise

controlling the vehicle. The driver should

decide when to use the system on the basis of

road, traffic, visibility, and weather conditions.

Active cruise control is intended for use on

highway-type roadways where traffic is moving

relatively smoothly. Do not use this system in

city driving; heavy traffic such as during rush

hour; on curvy, winding roads, slippery roads or

roads with sharp curves such as highway off-

ramps; during inclement weather such as snow,

strong rain or fog; or when entering inter-

changes, service/parking areas or toll booths.

It is also important to regulate your vehicle's

speed and distance setting within applicable

legal limits. Always be ready to take action or

apply the brakes if necessary, especially when

the system is actively following a vehicle in front

of you.<

Always remember that the range and abil-

ity of the system does have physical limi-

tations. It will not apply the brakes or decelerate

your vehicle when there is a slow-moving vehi-

cle, stopped vehicle or stationary object ahead

of you, as for example, at a traffic light or a

parked vehicle. Also, the system does not react

to oncoming traffic, pedestrians or other types

of potential traffic such as a rider on horseback.

It is also possible that the system may not

detect smaller moving objects such as motor-

cycles or bicycles. Be especially alert when

encountering any of these situations as the

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Driving

72

system will neither automatically brake, nor pro-

vide a warning to you. Also, be aware that every

decrease in the distance setting allows your

vehicle to come closer to a vehicle in front of

you and requires a heightened amount of alert-

ness.<

If while your vehicle is actively following a vehi-

cle in front of you and the vehicle ahead speeds

up or the lane ahead becomes clear, then your

vehicle will accelerate to the speed you have

selected. Be aware that changing to a clear,

unobstructed lane will also result in your vehicle

accelerating.

Be certain to deactivate the system when

you pull into an exit lane for a highway off-

ramp.<

Also, vehicles traveling in a staggered manner

on a highway may cause a delay in the system's

reaction to a vehicle in front of you or may cause

the system to react to a vehicle actually in the

lane next to you. Always be ready to take action

or apply the brakes if necessary.

Active cruise control can only decelerate the

vehicle to approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. If the sys-

tem reduces vehicle speed below 20 mph/

30 km/h or if DSC/ABS is engaged while driving,

the system will automatically deactivate.

Remember, the system cannot stop your

vehicle. In addition, the system is deacti-

vated whenever the driver applies the vehicle

brakes, shifts the transmission to neutral/N, or

deactivates DSC. After any deactivation, the

system will no longer automatically activate the

vehicle brakes, which means the driver must

intervene and resume manual braking. You

should then reactivate the system only when

you are fully aware of the prior speed and dis-

tance settings.<

Active cruise control may brake when you

reduce the stored desired speed; however, the

driver must constantly monitor traffic and inter-

vene if necessary.

When you switch off the engine or ignition,

active cruise control is fully switched off, too,

and any settings you have selected are can-

celed.

Swerving vehicles

When a vehicle moves from an adjacent lane

into your lane, active cruise control will not rec-

ognize this vehicle until it is fully in your lane

ahead of your vehicle.

Behavior in curves

Because of the limited range of the system, it is

possible that in curves or on the peaks and val-

leys of hilly roads, a vehicle ahead may be rec-

ognized late, or not at all. Therefore, it is up to

the driver to select a speed that is prudent in

view of the curves and terrain of the roadway.

In approaching a curve, it is possible that active

cruise control would react briefly to a vehicle in

the adjacent lane. In addition, the system can

sense if your vehicle is in a curve and may not

accelerate. If your vehicle decelerates in either

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

73

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

case, you can choose to overcome the deceler-

ation by briefly pressing the accelerator pedal.

Driver interventions

Anytime the driver presses down on the

accelerator pedal, any automatic braking

action by the system is interrupted until the

pedal is fully released. After doing this, release

the accelerator and the system again controls

your cruising speed and distance setting. While

driving with the system activated, resting your

foot on the accelerator pedal will cause the sys-

tem not to brake even if necessary. Be certain

that floor mats or other objects on the vehicle

floor do not interfere with movement of the

accelerator pedal.<

While active cruise control is capable of

braking your vehicle automatically when

you approach a slower vehicle ahead, it is

important to be aware that the ability of the sys-

tem to apply the brakes is also limited, e.g.

when you reduce your desired speed sharply.

The system cannot stop your vehicle. It uses

only a portion of braking system capacity and

does not utilize the full capacity of the vehicle

braking system. Therefore, the system cannot

decrease your speed due to large differences in

speed between your vehicle and the vehicle

ahead. Example: when you approach a vehicle

traveling at a much lower speed than your own

speed, such as approaching a toll booth or

when a much slower vehicle cuts in front of you

at close range.<

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Everything under control

74

Everything under control

Odometer, outside

temperature display, clock

1Time, outside temperature and data

2Odometer and trip odometer

3Press button:

>with ignition switched on, trip odometer

is reset

>briefly display the time, outside temper-

ature and odometer with the ignition

switched off

From radio readiness the outside temperature

and the time are displayed.

Date retrieval:

Press CHECK button on turn signal lever, refer

to page 80.

Time and date setting, refer to page 82.

You can set the unit of measure 7 or 6 on the

Control Display, refer to Units of measure on

page 84.

Outside temperature warning

If the display drops to +377/+36, a signal

sounds and a warning lamp lights up. A mes-

sage appears on the Control Display. There is

an increased danger of ice.

Even at temperatures above +377/

+36 ice can form. Therefore, drive care-

fully, e.g. on bridges and sections of road in the

shade, otherwise there is an increased accident

risk.<

Tachometer

The white-striped advance warning field,

arrow 1, changes depending on the engine

temperature. With increasing engine tempera-

ture the advance warning field becomes corre-

spondingly smaller. Avoid allowing the engine

speed to rise as far as the orange warning sec-

tor whenever possible.

Be sure to avoid engine speeds in the red warn-

ing field, arrow 2. In this range, the fuel supply is

interrupted to protect the engine.

Coolant temperature

Should the coolant, and with it the engine

become too hot, a warning lamp lights up. In

addition, a message appears on the Control

Display.

Checking coolant level, refer to page 207.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

75

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Energy Control

Displays the current fuel consumption. This

allows you to see whether your current driving

style is conducive to fuel economy with mini-

mum exhaust emissions.

Fuel gauge

Fuel tank capacity: approx. 18.5 gallons/

70 liters. You will find information on refueling

on page 194.

If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period,

when you are driving in mountainous areas, for

example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.

Reserve

After the reserve quantity has been reached, a

message briefly appears on the Control Display;

the remaining range is shown in the computer.

Below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km, the

message remains on the Control Display.

Refuel as soon as possible once your

cruising range falls below 30 miles/

50 km, otherwise engine functions are not

ensured and damage can occur.<

Computer

Displays in instrument cluster

To display the information, press the BC button

in the turn signal lever from radio readiness.

The following information is displayed in the

specified order:

>Cruising range

>Average speed

>Average fuel consumption

Cruising range

Displays the estimated cruising range available

with the remaining fuel. The range is projected

based on the driving style over the last 20 miles/

30 km.

Refuel as soon as possible once your

cruising range falls below 30 miles/

50 km, otherwise engine functions are not

ensured and damage can occur.<

Average speed

Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine

switched off are not included in the calculations

of average speed.

To reset average speed: press BC button on

turn signal lever for approx. 2 seconds.

Average fuel consumption

The average fuel consumption is calculated for

the time during which the engine is running.

You can use the Control Display to view your

fuel consumption rate over two different dis-

tances, refer to Displays on Control Display or

Trip computer

*

.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Everything under control

76

To reset average fuel consumption: press BC

button on turn signal lever for approx. 2 sec-

onds.

Displays on Control Display

You can also call up the computer via the iDrive.

For explanation of principle, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the right to open

"Navigation".

Without navigation system

*

:

Open "Car Data".

3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.

4. Select "Onboard info" and press the con-

troller.

>Estimated time of arrival at destination:

>Entering a distance manually in the com-

puter, see below.

>Entering a destination in the navigation

system

*

, refer to page 133.

>Cruising range

>Distance to destination:

>Entering a distance manually in the com-

puter, see below.

>Entering a destination in the navigation

system

*

, refer to page 133.

>Average speed

>Average fuel consumption

Resetting values

You can reset the values for the average speed

and average fuel consumption:

1. Select the respective menu item and press

the controller.

2. To confirm your selection, press the con-

troller again.

Entering a distance manually

1. Select "Distance to dest." and press the

controller.

2. Turn the controller to select the distance to

your destination. If needed, hold it against a

slight resistance to enter a larger differ-

ence.

3. Press the controller to apply the setting.

The distance is automatically preset during the

destination guidance of the navigation sys-

tem

*

.

Trip computer*

The trip computer is suitable, for example, for a

vacation trip.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Open "Navigation".

Without navigation system

*

:

Open "Car Data".

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

77

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.

4. Select "Trip computer" and press the con-

troller.

>Departure time

>Driving time

>Distance traveled

>Average speed

>Average fuel consumption

Starting or stopping the trip computer, or reset-

ting all values:

1. Select "Set" and press the controller.

2. Select the desired menu item.

3. Press the controller.

Display options

You can display the computer or the trip com-

puter in the assistance window.

1. Move the controller to the right to change to

the assistance window and press the con-

troller.

2. Select "Onboard info" or "Trip computer".

3. Press the controller.

Service requirements

The remaining driving distance and the date for

the next maintenance are displayed briefly with

the ignition switched on.

Your BMW Service Advisor can deter-

mine your vehicle's current service

requirements by reading out the data stored in

the remote control.<

Additional information

You can select a display of more detailed infor-

mation on the maintenance scope on the Con-

trol Display. For explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Service" and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Everything under control

78

4. Select "Service requirements" and press

the controller.

5. Select "Status" and press the controller.

The display shows a list of selected service and

maintenance procedures, as well as legally

mandated inspections.

You can request more detailed information on

every entry.

Select the entry and press the controller.

To exit from the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Symbols

No service is currently required.

The deadline for service or a legally man-

dated inspection is approaching. Please

arrange a service appointment.

The service deadline has already passed.

Entering dates for state emission and

vehicle inspections*

Make sure the date on the Control Display is

always set correctly, refer to page 82, otherwise

the effectiveness of CBS Condition Based Ser-

vice is not ensured.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Service" and press the controller.

4. Select "Service requirements" and press

the controller.

5. Select "Status" and press the controller.

6. Select "Emission inspect." or "State

inspection" and press the controller.

7. Select "Set service date" and press the

controller. The month is highlighted.

8. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

79

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

9. Press the controller to apply the setting.

The year is highlighted.

10. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

11. Press the controller to apply the setting.

The date entry is stored.

To exit the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Check Control

The concept

The Check Control monitors functions in the

vehicle and issues a message if there is a mal-

function in the monitored systems. This kind of

Check Control message consists of indicator

and warning lamps in the instrument cluster,

and if necessary an acoustic signal and text

messages at the bottom of the Control Display.

Indicator and warning lamps

Indicator and warning lamps can light up both in

the display area 1 and in the display 2 in various

combinations and colors.

means that a Check Control message has

been generated. The symbol continues to be

visible even when the Check Control message

disappears after a short time. The warning

lamps and text messages are stored and can be

displayed later, also refer to page 80.

Explanatory text messages

Text message at the bottom edge of the Con-

trol Display explain the meaning of the dis-

played indicator and warning lamps.

You can display additional information on most

Check Control messages later, e.g. on the

cause of the malfunction and on corresponding

need for action, see below.

In the case of corresponding urgency, this infor-

mation is displayed immediately when the

related lamp lights up.

Exit the displayed information:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Importance of Check Control

messages

Important Check Control messages continue to

be displayed until the malfunctions have been

corrected. They cannot be deleted. If a number

of malfunctions occur simultaneously, they are

displayed in succession.

Less important messages disappear after

approx. 20 seconds, but remain in memory.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Everything under control

80

To hide these Check Control messages:

Press the CHECK button on turn signal lever.

Displaying stored Check Control

messages

1. Hold the button down:

The first stored message is displayed.

2. Press the button:

When the button is pressed again, a differ-

ent message is displayed.

Displaying additional information later

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Service" and press the controller.

4. Select "Check Control messages" and

press the controller.

5. Select a text message and press the con-

troller.

To exit the display:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Indication of malfunction urgency

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the

stored Check Control messages are also dis-

played with the following symbols:

No malfunctions are present in the moni-

tored systems.

Malfunctions are present in the moni-

tored systems. Depending on the mal-

function, supplementary information is

shown on the Control Display.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

81

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

The symbols also indicate the status of the ser-

vice requirements display, refer to page 77.

Displays after completion of trip

Malfunction reports generated during the trip

are shown consecutively when you switch off

the ignition.

Before the display disappears, you can display

the messages once again. Press the CHECK

button for approx. 2 seconds. If several mes-

sages are present, you can continue to press

the CHECK button to view them in succession.

The display goes out

>automatically after a brief period

>when you press the CHECK button again

for approximately 2 seconds

Speed limit

You can enter a speed and a Check Control

message indicates when you have reached this

speed. This enables you, for example, to

receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in

an urban area.

You are only warned of reaching this speed a

second time if your vehicle speed falls below it

again by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing limit

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Open "Navigation".

Without navigation system

*

:

Open "Car Data".

3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.

4. Select "Limit" and press the controller.

5. Select the speed value and press the con-

troller.

6. Turn the controller to set the limit. If

needed, hold it against a slight resistance

to enter a larger difference.

7. Press the controller to apply the setting.

The limit is automatically activated.

Applying your current speed as limit

Select "Select current speed" and press the

controller. The system adopts your current

speed as the limit.

Activating limit

Select "On" and press the controller.

Limit is automatically activated.

Stopwatch

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Open "Navigation".

Without navigation system

*

:

Open "Car Data".

3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Everything under control

82

4. Select "Stopwatch" and press the control-

ler.

Starting, stopping or resetting

>Select "Start" and press the controller.

The stopwatch starts at the displayed time.

>Select "Reset" and press the controller.

The stopwatch is reset and it restarts if it

was running beforehand.

>Select "Stop" and press the controller.

This stops the timer.

Taking an intermediate time reading

Select "Interim time" and press the controller.

The interim time appears below the ongoing

primary stopwatch count.

All of the remaining functions remain

available at all times while the stopwatch

is running. The stopwatch continues operation

in the background.<

Settings on Control Display

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Press the button once or twice until

the start menu appears.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Display settings"

is selected and press the controller.

Setting time

1. Move the controller once to the front if nec-

essary to change to the first field from the

top.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

83

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

2. Turn the controller until "Time" is selected

and press the controller.

3. Turn the controller until "Set time" is

selected and press the controller.

Making settings

1. Turn the controller to set the hours and

press the controller.

2. Turn the controller to set the minutes and

press the controller.

The changed time is stored.

Switching on hour signal*

You will hear three tones just before each full

hour.

Select "Hour memo" and press the controller.

The hour signal is activated.

Setting time format

1. Select "Time format" and press the control-

ler.

2. Select the desired format and press the

controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Setting date

1. Select "Date" and press the controller.

2. Select "Set date" and press the controller.

The first section of the date display is high-

lighted, in this case the month.

3. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

4. Press the controller to apply the setting.

The next setting is highlighted.

5. Make the remaining adjustments. After the

last adjustment, the date is stored.

Changing date format

1. Select "Date format" and press the control-

ler.

2. Select the desired format and press the

controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Brightness of Control Display

The brightness is automatically adapted to the

ambient lighting conditions. However, you can

change the basic setting.

1. Select "Brightness" and press the control-

ler.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Everything under control

84

2. If necessary, move the controller to the right

to select "Display".

3. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is selected.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Units of measure

You can change the units of measure for con-

sumption, distances, temperature and pres-

sure.

1. Select "Units" and press the controller.

2. Select the menu item to be set and press

the controller.

3. Select the desired unit of measure and

press the controller.

The settings are stored for the remote key cur-

rently in use.

Language on Control Display

1. Select "Languages" and press the control-

ler.

2. Select "Text language" and press the con-

troller. You can change the language of the

text displays.

3. Select and activate the desired language by

pressing the controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

85

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Technology for comfort, convenience and

safety

PDC Park Distance Control*

The concept

The PDC assists you when you are parking.

Acoustic signals and an optical display

*

alert

you to the approach of an object from behind

your vehicle. To measure the distance, there

are four ultrasonic sensors in each bumper.

The range of these sensors is approx. 7 ft/2 m.

However, an acoustic warning first sound for

the sensors at the front and at the two rear cor-

ners at approx. 24 in/60 cm, and for the center

rear sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.

PDC is a parking aid that can indicate

objects when they are approached

slowly, as is usually the case when parking.

Avoid approaching an object at high speed, oth-

erwise the physical circumstances would mean

that the system warning was too late.<

Automatic activation

The system starts to operate automatically

approx. 1 second after you select reverse gear

or move the selector lever into the R position

with the engine running or the ignition switched

on.

Wait this short period before driving.

Manual activation

Press button, the LED lights up.

Manual deactivation

Press the button again; the LED goes out.

After driving approx. 165 ft/50 m or at over

approx. 20 mph/30 km/h, the system is

switched off and the LED goes out. You can

reactivate the system manually as needed.

Signal tones

When nearing an object, the position is corre-

spondingly indicated by an interval tone. Thus,

an object detected to the left rear of the vehicle

will be indicated by a signal tone from the left

rear speaker, etc. As the distance between

vehicle and object decreases, the intervals

between the tones become shorter. If the dis-

tance to the nearest object falls to below

roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a continuous tone

sounds.

An intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.

3seconds:

>if you remain in front of an object that was

only detected by one of the corner sensors

>if you drive parallel to a wall

Malfunction

The LED in the button flashes and a message

appears on the Control Display. PDC is mal-

functioning. Have the system checked.

To prevent this problem, keep the sensors

clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure

that they will continue to operate effectively. Do

not spray the sensors with high-pressure clean-

ers for long periods and maintain a distance of

at least 4 in/10 cm to them.

PDC with visual warning*

You can also have the system show distances

to objects on the Control Display. Objects that

are farther away are already shown there before

a signal tone sounds. The setting is stored for

the remote control currently in use.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

86

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the

controller.

4. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the

controller until "PDC" is selected and press

the controller.

5. Select "PDC display on" and press the con-

troller.

The PDC screen is activated.

The display appears on the Control Display as

soon as PDC is activated.

System limits

Even with PDC, final responsibility for

estimating the distance between the

vehicle and any obstructions always remains

with the driver. Even when sensors are pro-

vided, there is a blind spot in which objects can

no longer be detected. This applies especially

in those cases where the system approaches

the physical constraints of ultrasonic measure-

ment, as occurs with tow bars and trailer cou-

plings, and in the vicinity of thin or wedge-

shaped objects. Low objects already displayed,

e.g. a curb, can disappear from the detection

area of the sensors again before a continuous

tone sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g.

ledges, cannot be detected. Loud sources of

sound, inside and outside the vehicle, could

drown out the PDC signal tone.<

Driving stability control

systems

Your BMW is equipped with an extended array

of systems designed to enhance and maintain

vehicle stability under extreme conditions.

ABS Antilock Brake System

ABS prevents locking of the wheels during

braking. Safe steering response is maintained

even during full braking. Active safety is thus

increased.

The ABS is operational every time you start the

engine. Braking safely refer to page 125.

CBC Cornering Brake Control

When braking during curves or when braking

during a lane change, driving stability and steer-

ing response are improved further.

Electronic brake-force distribution

The system controls the brake pressure in the

rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.

DBC Dynamic Brake Control

When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system

automatically produces the maximum braking

force boost and thus helps to achieve the short-

est possible braking distance during full brak-

ing. This system exploits all of the benefits pro-

vided by ABS.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal

for the duration of the full braking.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels

when starting off and accelerating. DSC also

identifies unstable driving conditions, such as a

loss of traction at the rear of the vehicle or slid-

ing of the vehicle in its front wheels. In these

cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe

course within physical limits by reducing engine

output and through braking actions in the indi-

vidual wheels.

The laws of physics cannot be repealed,

even with DSC. An appropriate driving

style always remains the responsibility of the

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

87

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

driver. Therefore, do not reduce the additional

safety margin further by taking risks.<

Deactivating DSC

Press the button until the DSC indicator lamp in

the instrument cluster lights up, but not longer

than approx. 10 seconds. DTC Dynamic Trac-

tion Control and DSC are deactivated together.

Stabilizing and drive output promoting actions

are no longer executed. In addition, the stability

promoting intervention of the active steering

*

is deactivated, refer to page 93.

A message appears on the Control Display.

Please note any supplementary information

that appears there.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again

as soon as possible.

Activating DSC

Press the button; the indicator lamp in the

instrument cluster goes out.

For better control

The indicator lamp flashes:

DSC controls the drive forces and

brake forces.

The indicator lamp lights up:

DSC is deactivated.

DTC Dynamic Traction Control

DTC is a version of DSC in which the drive out-

put is optimized for particular road conditions,

e.g. unplowed snow-covered roads. The sys-

tem assures the maximal drive output, but with

reduced driving stability. It is therefore neces-

sary to drive with appropriate caution.

You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC

under the following special circumstances:

>When driving on snowy inclines, in slush, or

on unplowed, snow-covered road surfaces

>When rocking a stuck vehicle free or start-

ing off in deep snow or on loose ground

>When driving with snow chains

*

Activating DTC

Press the button briefly; the DTC indicator lamp

in the instrument cluster lights up.

For better control

The indicator lamp flashes:

DTC controls the drive forces and

brake forces.

The indicator lamp lights up:

DTC is activated.

Deactivating DTC

Press the button again; the DTC indicator lamp

in the instrument cluster goes out.

xDrive on 525xi, 530xi

xDrive is the 4-wheel drive system of your

BMW. The combined effects of xDrive and DSC

further optimize the traction and dynamic driv-

ing characteristics. The 4-wheel drive system

xDrive variably distributes the drive torque to

the front and rear axle depending on the driving

situation and prevailing road conditions.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

88

HDC Hill Descent Control on 525xi,

530xi

The concept

HDC is a system for driving downhill in steep

terrain. This system reduces vehicle speed on

steep downhill gradients, thus allowing you to

maintain even better control of your BMW

under these conditions. The vehicle moves at

approximately twice walking speed without

active intervention from the driver.

HDC is available for activation at vehicle speeds

below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When driving

down steep hills with a speed below approx.

22 mph/35 km/h, the vehicle reduces speed

automatically down to approximately double

walking speed, approx. 7 mph/12 km/h, and

then maintains this speed at a constant.

You can use the accelerator or brakes to vary

this automatically controlled speed within a

range extending from approx. 3 mph/5 km/h to

15 mph/25 km/h.

You can specify a target speed within the same

range by using the lever of the cruise control.

Activating HDC

You can activate HDC:

>with the programmable buttons on the

steering wheel, refer to page 53

>or via iDrive

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the

controller.

4. Select "HDC" and press the controller.

5. Select "HDC on" and press the controller.

The HDC display is shown in the instrument

cluster.

If the vehicle is automatically braked, a message

is displayed on the Control Display for approx.

20 seconds.

Deactivating HDC

When you use the programmable buttons on

the steering wheel or via iDrive, the HDC display

goes out.

Over approx. 37 mph/60 km/h HDC is immedi-

ately deactivated, and after approx. 10 seconds

when the ignition is switched off.

Using HDC

Manual transmission:

Use HDC in low gears and reverse gear.

Automatic transmission:

You can use HDC in every drive position.

Displays in instrument cluster

1Display for target speed

2HDC display

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

89

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Malfunction

If the HDC display goes out in the HDC mode or

is not shown:

HDC is temporarily not available, as the brake

temperature is too high.

Dynamic Drive*

The concept

Dynamic Drive minimizes body roll and opti-

mizes vehicle stability during cornering and

evasive maneuvers.

Dynamic Drive is based on active stabilizers on

the front and rear axles. Suspension compli-

ance adapts to suit driving conditions, varying

from performance-oriented during cornering to

smooth and comfort-oriented when the vehicle

is proceeding in a straight line. During vehicle

operation, the system continuously runs

through closed-loop control cycles lasting only

fractions of a second.

The system assumes operational status each

time you start the engine.

Malfunction

The warning lamp lights up yellow and

a message is shown on the Control Dis-

play. There is a malfunction in the sys-

tem. Have the system checked as soon as pos-

sible.

If a malfunction occurs, please remember

to adapt your speed accordingly, espe-

cially in curves.

The suspension will be noticeably softer and

the vehicle will display a greater tendency to tilt

during cornering and in crosswinds.

If a message stating that you should stop is

shown on the Control Display, stop at a suitable

location and switch off the engine as soon as

possible. In this case the oil level in the reservoir

may have dropped below the minimum, possi-

bly owing to a leak in the hydraulic system.

Do not continue driving, but instead contact

your BMW center.<

Sports Wagon:

Self-leveling suspension

xDrive: the vehicle is raised somewhat at

the rear after locking. This is normal and is

linked to minor noises.<

Malfunction

The warning lamp for self-leveling sus-

pension lights up yellow and a message

is shown on the Control Display. A mal-

function has occurred in the self-leveling sus-

pension. Stop and check the vehicle. If it is con-

siderably lower at the rear than at the front, and

possibly also on one side – rear left compared to

rear right –, go to the nearest BMW center or a

workshop that works according to BMW repair

procedures with correspondingly trained per-

sonnel. Drive with appropriate caution in the

meantime. The vehicle has reduced ground

clearance and driving comfort may be notice-

ably reduced. Even if the position of the vehicle

is normal, go to the nearest BMW center or a

workshop that works according to BMW repair

procedures with correspondingly trained per-

sonnel.

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

The concept

The Flat Tire Monitor keeps track of the infla-

tion pressures in the tires as you drive. The sys-

tem provides an alert whenever the inflation

pressure drops significantly in relation to the

pressure in another tire.

In the event of a pressure loss, the rolling radius

and therefore the rotation speed of the wheels

change. This change is detected and is

reported as a flat tire.

Functional requirement

In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat

tire, the system must be initialized for the cor-

rect tire inflation pressure.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

90

The initialization must be repeated after

each time the tire inflation pressure is cor-

rected and after every tire or wheel change.<

System limits

The Flat Tire Monitor cannot indicate

sudden severe tire damage caused by

outside factors and does not detect a natural,

even pressure drop in all four tires.<

In the following situations, the system could be

delayed or malfunction:

>System has not been initialized

>Driving on snowy or slippery road surface

>Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,

high lateral acceleration

>Driving with snow chains

*

When you are driving with the compact wheel

*

the Flat Tire Monitor is unable to function.

Initializing system

The initialization finishes during driving,

which can be interrupted at any time.

When driving resumes, the initialization is con-

tinued automatically. Do not initialize the sys-

tem when driving with snow chains

*

or com-

pact wheel

*

.<

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the

controller.

4. Select "FTM" and press the controller.

5. Start the engine, but do not start driving.

6. Select "Set tire pressure" and press the

controller.

7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.

8. Start to drive.

The message "Initializing..." is displayed.

The initialization finishes during driving. Then

the message "Status: FTM active" appears on

the Control Display again.

Indication of a flat tire

The warning lamp lights up red. A mes-

sage appears on the Control Display.

In addition, an acoustic signal sounds.

There is a flat tire or extensive inflation pressure

loss.

1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle care-

fully. Avoid sudden braking and steering

maneuvers.

2. Identify damaged tire.

If identification is not possible, con-

tact a BMW center.<

3. Replace the damaged wheel, refer to

Changing wheels on page 215.

Run-flat tires*

1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/

80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steer-

ing maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of

50 mph/80 km/h.

If the vehicle is not equipped with run-

flat tires, refer to page 201, do not

continue driving. Continuing to drive with a

flat tire could cause severe accidents.<

2. At the next opportunity, check the air pres-

sure in all four tires.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

91

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

If the tire inflation pressure in all four

tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor

may not have been initialized. The system

must then be initialized.<

3. In the event of complete tire pressure loss,

0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible

distance for continued driving on the basis

of the following guide values:

>With a light load:

1 to 2 persons without luggage:

approx. 155 miles/250 km

>With a medium load:

2 persons, luggage compartment or

cargo area full, or 4 persons without

luggage:

approx. 94 miles/150 km

>With a full load:

from 4 persons, luggage compartment

or cargo area full:

approx. 30 miles/50 km

Drive reservedly and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. In the event of

pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This

includes reduced tracking stability in braking,

extended braking distance and altered natural

steering characteristics.

If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur while

the vehicle is being driven, this can indicate final

failure of the damaged tire. Reduce speed and

stop at a suitable location as soon as possible,

otherwise pieces of the tire could become

detached and cause an accident. Do not con-

tinue driving, but instead contact your BMW

center.<

TPM Tire Pressure Monitor*

The concept

TPM checks the tire inflation pressure in the

four mounted tires. The system reports when

the tire inflation pressure has dropped consid-

erably in one or several tires.

Functional requirement

In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat

tire, the system must have been reset with the

correct tire inflation pressure.

Always use wheels with TPM electronics, as

otherwise fault-free operation of the system is

not ensured.

Reset the system again after each correc-

tion of the tire inflation pressure and after

every tire or wheel change.<

System limits

TPM cannot announce sudden serious

tire damage caused by external influ-

ences.<

The system does not function properly if it has

not been reset, e.g. a flat tire is reported despite

correct tire inflation pressures.

The system is inactive and cannot display a flat

tire if a wheel has been mounted without TPM

electronics, e.g. a compact wheel, or if TPM is

temporarily interfered with by other systems or

devices which use the same radio frequency.

Status display on Control Display

The tire and system status is indicated by the

color of the tires.

TPM takes the fact that the tire pressure

changes during driving into account. A correc-

tion is only required if requested by TPM with

the color.

Green

The tire pressure matches the learned set state.

"TPM active" is displayed on the Control Dis-

play.

A wheel is yellow

Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in

the indicated tire. A message appears on the

Control Display.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

92

All wheels are yellow

Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in

several tires. A message appears on the Control

Display.

Gray

The system cannot detect a flat tire.

Reasons for this can be:

>TPM is being reset

>Temporary interference due to systems or

devices which use the same radio fre-

quency

>Malfunction

Resetting system

Reset the system again after each correc-

tion of the tire inflation pressure and after

every tire or wheel change.<

Resetting finishes during driving, which can be

interrupted at any time. When driving resumes,

resetting is continued automatically. Do not

reset the system when driving with a compact

wheel

*

.

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the

controller.

4. Select "TPM" and press the controller.

5. Start the engine, but do not start driving.

6. Select "Reset" and press the controller.

7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.

8. Start to drive.

The tires are shown in gray and

"Resetting TPM..." is displayed.

After a few minutes of driving, the set tire infla-

tion pressures in the tires are applied as the set

values to be monitored. Resetting finishes dur-

ing driving. The tires are shown in gray on the

Control Display and "Status: TPM active" is dis-

played again.

If a flat tire is detected during resetting

and applying the tire inflation pressures,

all tires are shown in yellow on the Control Dis-

play. The message "Tire low!" is displayed.<

Message with low tire inflation

pressure

The warning lamp lights up yellow. A

message appears on the Control Dis-

play. In addition, an acoustic signal

sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation

pressure loss.

1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle care-

fully. Avoid sudden braking and steering

maneuvers.

2. Check whether your vehicle is equipped

with standard tires or run-flat tires.

You will recognize run-flat tires by a

circular symbol containing the letters

RSC on the side of the tire, refer to

page 201.<

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

93

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Standard tires

1. If all four wheels are shown in yellow, iden-

tify the damaged tire on the vehicle.

2. Replace the damaged wheel or wheels,

refer to Changing wheels on page 215.

In contrast to a compact wheel, a spare wheel is

equipped with the necessary TPM electronics

and also monitored after mounting and after

resetting the system.

Have the tire replaced by a BMW center or a

workshop informed on handling TPM which

works according to BMW repair procedures

with correspondingly trained personnel.

Run-flat tires*

1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/

80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steer-

ing maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of

50 mph/80 km/h.

If the vehicle is not equipped with run-

flat tires, refer to page 201, do not

continue driving. Continuing to drive with a

flat tire could cause severe accidents.<

2. In the event of complete tire pressure loss,

0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible

distance for continued driving on the basis

of the following guide values:

>With a light load:

1 to 2 persons without luggage:

approx. 155 miles/250 km

>With a medium load:

2 persons, luggage compartment or

cargo area full, or 4 persons without

luggage:

approx. 95 miles/150 km

>With a full load:

from 4 persons, luggage compartment

or cargo area full:

approx. 30 miles/50 km

Drive reservedly and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. In the event of

pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This

includes reduced tracking stability in braking,

extended braking distance and altered natural

steering characteristics.

If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur while

the vehicle is being driven, this can indicate final

failure of the damaged tire. Reduce speed and

stop at a suitable location as soon as possible,

otherwise pieces of the tire could become

detached and cause an accident. Do not con-

tinue driving, but instead contact your BMW

center.<

Malfunction

The yellow warning light flashes and

then lights up continuously. The tires

are shown in gray on the Control Dis-

play and a message is displayed. No flat tire can

be detected.

A message like this is displayed in the following

situations:

>In case of a malfunction;

have the system checked.

>If a wheels is mounted without TPM elec-

tronics

>If TPM is temporarily interfered with by

other systems or devices which use the

same radio frequency.

Active steering*

The concept

The active steering is a system that actively var-

ies the steering angle of the front wheels in rela-

tion to the steering wheel movements.

When you are driving in the low road speed

range, e.g. in a town or when parking, the steer-

ing angle increases, i.e. the steering becomes

very direct. In the higher speed range, on the

other hand, the steering angle is reduced more

and more. This improves the handling capability

of your BMW over the entire speed range.

In critical situations, the system can make tar-

geted corrections to the steering angle pro-

vided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle

before the driver intervenes. This stabilizing

intervention is simultaneously deactivated

when DSC is switched off, refer to page 87.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

94

Malfunction

The warning lamp lights up yellow and

a message is shown on the Control Dis-

play. The active steering is no longer

operational. At low speeds, greater steering

wheel movements are required, whereas at

higher speeds, the vehicle reacts more sen-

sitively to steering wheel movements. The

stability-promoting intervention can also be

deactivated. Proceed cautiously and drive

defensively. Have the system checked.

Brake force display

Left-hand picture: normal braking.

Right-hand picture: heavy braking.

Airbags

The following airbags are located under the

marked covers:

1Front airbags

2Head airbags

3Side airbags in front and rear

Protective action

To ensure that the safety systems con-

tinue to provide optimized protection,

please observe the adjustment instructions on

page 45.<

The front airbags help protect the driver and

front passenger by responding to frontal

impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro-

vide adequate restraint. When needed, the

head and side airbags help provide protection in

the event of side impact. The relevant side air-

bag supports the side upper body area. The

head air bag supports the head.

The airbags are deliberately not triggered in

every impact situation, e.g. less severe acci-

dents or rear-end collisions.

Do not apply adhesive materials to the

cover panels of the airbags, cover them or

modify them in any other way. Do not attempt to

remove the airbag retention system from the

vehicle. Do not modify or tamper with either the

wiring or the individual components in the air-

bag system. This category includes the uphol-

stery in the center of the steering wheel, on the

instrument panel, the doors and the roof pillars

along with the sides of the headliner. Do not

attempt to remove or dismantle the steering

wheel. Do not touch the individual components

immediately after the system has been trig-

gered, because there is a danger of burns.

In the event of malfunctions, deactivation, or

triggering of the airbag restraint system, have

the testing, repair, removal, and disposal of air-

bag generators executed only by a BMW center

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

95

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

or a workshop that works according to BMW

repair procedures with correspondingly trained

personnel and has the required explosives

licenses. Unprofessional attempts to service

the system could lead to failure in an emer-

gency or undesired airbag activation, either of

which could result in personal injury.<

Warnings and information on the airbags is also

provided on the sun visors.

Automatic deactivation of front

passenger airbags

The occupation of the seat is detected by eval-

uating the impression on the occupied seat sur-

face of the front passenger seat. The front and

side airbag on the front passenger side are acti-

vated or deactivated accordingly by the system.

The current status of the front passenger

airbag, i.e. deactivated or activated, is

indicated by the indicator lamp over the interior

rearview mirror, refer to Operating state of front

passenger airbags in the following.<

Before transporting a child on the front

passenger seat, observe the safety infor-

mation and handling instructions under Trans-

porting children safely refer to page 54.

The front and side airbag on the front passen-

ger side can be deactivated for teenagers and

adults in certain seat positions; then the indica-

tor lamp for the front passenger airbags lights

up. In these cases, change the seat position so

that the front passenger airbags are activated

and the indicator lamp goes out. If the desired

status cannot be produced by changing the

seat position, transport the corresponding per-

son on the rear seat. Do not fit seat covers, seat

cushion padding, ball mats or other items onto

the front passenger seat unless they are specif-

ically recommended by BMW. Do not lay

objects under the seat which could press

against the seat from below. Otherwise a cor-

rect evaluation of the occupied seat surface

cannot be ensured.<

Operating state of front passenger

airbags

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the

arrangement of the switches and indicator

lamps may differ somewhat.

The indicator lamp for the front passenger air-

bags indicates the operating status of the front

and side airbag on the front passenger side

depending on the seat occupation. The indica-

tor lamp shows whether the front passenger

airbags are activated or deactivated.

>The indicator lamp lights up when a child in

a child restraint system intended for the

purpose is properly detected on the seat.

The front and side airbag on the front pas-

senger side are not activated.

>The indicator lamp does not light up when,

for example, a correctly seated person of

sufficient height is detected on the seat.

The front and side airbag on the front pas-

senger side are activated.

>The indicator lamp does not light up when

the seat is empty.

However, the front and side airbag on the

front passenger side are not activated.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

96

Operational readiness of airbag system

From radio readiness, refer to page 58, the

warning lamp lights up briefly, indicating the

operational readiness of the entire airbag sys-

tem and the safety belt tensioners.

Airbag system malfunction

>Warning lamp does not light up from radio

readiness.

>Warning lamp lights up continuously.

Have the airbag system checked immedi-

ately in case of a malfunction, otherwise

there is a danger that the airbag system may not

respond in the expected manner in an accident

despite an impact of corresponding intensity.<

Head-Up Display*

The concept

With the Head-Up Display important informa-

tion is projected into the driver's field of view,

e.g. navigation instructions. This enables you to

take in this information without looking away

from the road.

Switching on/off

With the engine running or the ignition switched

on:

Press the button to activate or deactivate the

Head-Up Display.

1Navigation instructions

2Display

>Cruise control

>Active cruise control

3Speed

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

97

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Selecting displays

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Display settings" and press the

controller.

4. Select "Head-Up Display" and press the

controller.

5. Select desired information of Head-Up Dis-

play.

6. Press the controller.

The information is shown on the Head-

Up Display.

The settings are stored for the remote key cur-

rently in use.

Setting brightness

The brightness of the display is automatically

adapted to the ambient lighting conditions.

However, you can change the base setting.

With the low beams switched on, the brightness

can also be adjusted with the knurled wheel of

the instrument lighting.

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Display settings" and press the

controller.

4. Select "Brightness" and press the control-

ler.

5. Move the controller to the left to select

"Head-Up Display".

6. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is selected.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Notes

The visibility of the displays in the Head-Up Dis-

play is influenced by:

>Sunglasses with certain polarization filters

>Certain seating positions

>Objects on the cover of the Head-Up Dis-

play

>Wet road surface and unfavorable lighting

conditions

If the image is distorted, please have the basic

setting checked at a BMW center.

Special windshield

The windshield is part of the system. The shape

of the windshield complies with the require-

ments of the Head-Up Display to enable a pre-

cise display. A film in the windshield prevents

the double images from being displayed.

Windshield replacement should be carried out

by a BMW center or a workshop that works

according to BMW repair procedures with cor-

respondingly trained personnel.

Care instructions

You can find everything you need to know on

this topic by consulting the separate Caring for

your vehicle brochure.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

98

Only clean the cover of the Head-Up Dis-

play with a soft, lint-free cloth or with a

display cleaning cloth, otherwise damage may

result.<

BMW Night Vision*

The concept

BMW Night Vision is a driver assistance system

that is designed to provide enhanced vision for

certain objects at night. This can be especially

helpful for detecting people and larger animals.

When objects are detected, the driver may be

able to take appropriate action sooner. For

example, the driver may identify and detect the

presence of persons or animals in the road

ahead or off to the sides and can be more alert,

slow down or stop, blow the horn etc. The driver

can decide which actions are appropriate and

then react accordingly.

A certain area in front of the vehicle is viewed by

an infrared camera and a generated image is

shown on the Control Display. The resulting

thermal image shows the relative heat radiation

of the objects present in the camera's field of

view. Warmer objects appear brighter and

cooler objects appear darker. Contrast is

dependent on the temperature difference

between the objects and the background and

on the amount of heat radiation of the object

itself. As a result, it is quite possible that a per-

son is not continually recognizable as a person

in shape, since the thermal radiation can be

affected by different clothing which blocks heat

loss. Objects with little temperature difference

to the surrounding area, or little heat radiation

are less noticeable, for example in cold weather.

Any improvement in detection depends on

many factors such as the object size and tem-

perature compared to the surroundings, or

other nearby objects, the visual recognition

skills of the driver, weather conditions, and

other factors.

Driving hints

With the system active, periodically but briefly,

glance at the thermal image on the Control Dis-

play to notice objects that could be people or

larger animals. The glance should be similar to

glancing at the rear view mirror. Do not stare at

the image for long periods while driving, as this

will remove attention from the road. If you notice

an object of interest ahead, be prepared to slow

down or stop, blow the horn, or take other

appropriate action.

System limits

The system is designed to supplement but not

replace forward vision through the windshield.

The driver is responsible for safe driving at

night. BMW Night Vision is not designed to be

used as a continuous viewing window for driv-

ing at night.

No system, no matter how sophisticated, can

operate without limitations. BMW Night Vision

operation is subject to physical and environ-

mental limitations that will reduce the ability of

the system to detect and display a clear thermal

image. Some of the situations in which these

limitations can occur are:

>on steep hilltops or depressions and in tight

curves

>in tunnels, as the contrast is inherently low

>when the camera lens is dirty

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

99

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

>in dense fog, heavy rain or snowfall

>when displaying very hot objects such as

transformers, car exhausts etc.

>when the image briefly freezes during nor-

mal system adjustment.

BMW Night Vision's potential benefits

can be limited by the driving style of the

driver, the size and relative temperature of the

detected objects, dirt or contamination on the

camera lens, adverse weather like snow, rain or

fog, and other factors not mentioned here. It will

always be the driver's responsibility to drive at a

speed and in a manner that recognizes potential

hazards and adjust accordingly.

BMW Night Vision is not a substitute or replace-

ment for driver responsibility or for accommo-

dating the visibility conditions and the traffic sit-

uation. The forward view illuminated by the

headlamps must always be the basis for making

safe driving decisions, otherwise a safety risk

will result.<

Activating BMW Night Vision

1. Turn the light switch to position 2 or 3, refer

to page 101.

2. With low beams switched on:

>Press the button. Depending on the

vehicle's equipment, the location of the

button may differ somewhat.

>Press one of the programmable buttons

on the steering wheel, refer to page 53.

The image will be displayed on the Control Dis-

play after a few seconds. Depending on the last

mode selected, either the normal or full screen

image will be displayed.

Due to the system's need to adjust periodically,

a still image is displayed at certain intervals for

fractions of a second. This is normal and not an

indication of a problem.

To prevent driving without headlamps, at a

speed of more than approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and

when dark, the thermal image on the Control

Display is only shown when the low beams are

on.

Deactivating BMW Night Vision

>Press the button.

>Press the button on the steering wheel.

>Press the button.

>Via iDrive", refer to Selecting settings.

Selecting settings

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Activate BMW Night Vision.

2. Press the controller to display the menu

items.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

100

3. Select the menu item and press the control-

ler:

>"End Night Vision":

Deactivate BMW Night Vision.

>"Zoom":

At higher speeds, the image is zoomed

in.

>"Curve mode":

Depending on the steering angle and

other parameters, the image sections

follows the course of the road to some

degree.

>"Full screen":

The image is shown on the entire Con-

trol Display.

>"Contrast":

The contrast of the screen can be

adjusted.

>"Brightness":

The brightness of the screen can be

adjusted.

"Curve mode" can only be activated with

the "Zoom" function switched on. With

"Full screen" activated, "Curve mode" and

"Zoom" cannot be selected.<

The settings are stored for the remote control

currently in use.

To exit the menu:

The image will automatically disappear after

approx. 5 seconds.

Cleaning camera

The function of the camera may be affected by

heavy rain and fog, dirt, snow or ice on the lens.

When this occurs, the displayed image on the

Control Display may become gray.

To minimize icing, the camera lens is automati-

cally heated. However, it may be necessary to

clean the camera lens manually under severe

weather conditions. When doing so, cautiously

remove any debris, ice or snow. To avoid dam-

age to the lens, do not use sharp or abrasive

instruments to clean ice, snow, or dirt off the

lens.

When the windshield is cleaned with the head-

lamps on, the camera lens area is automatically

sprayed as well. Refer to page 65.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

101

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Lamps

Parking lamps/low beams

0Lights off and daytime running lamps

*

1Parking lamps and daytime running lamps

*

2Low beams

3Automatic headlamp control

*

, daytime run-

ning lamps

*

, Adaptive Head Light

*

and

high-beam assistant

*

Parking lamps

In switch position 1, the front, rear and side

vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the

parking lamps for parking. For lighting on one

side for parking as an additional feature, refer to

page 102.

The parking lamps drain the battery. Do

not leave them switched on for long peri-

ods of time, as otherwise it may no longer be

possible to start the engine.<

Low beams

The low beams light up in switch position 2 only

with the engine running. Otherwise the parking

lamps are lit.

Automatic headlamp control*

In the switch position 3, the system activates

the low beams and switches them on or off in

response to changes in ambient light condi-

tions, for instance, in a tunnel, at dawn and dusk

and in case of precipitation. Adaptive Head

Light

*

is active. The LED next to the symbol is

illuminated when the low beams are on.

When driving into a tunnel with bright overhead

lighting, switching on of the lights may be

delayed.

A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can

cause the lights to be switched on.

The low beams remain switched on inde-

pendent of the ambient lighting condi-

tions when you switch on the fog lamps

*

.<

If desired, the light switch can be left in the

position 3. The exterior lighting is automatically

switched off after switching off the vehicle.

The automatic headlamp control cannot

serve as a substitute for your personal

judgment in determining when the lamps

should be switched on in response to ambient

lighting conditions. For example, the sensors

cannot detect fog of hazy weather. To avoid

safety risks, you should always switch on the

lamps manually under these conditions.<

Pathway lighting

When you activate the headlamp flasher after

parking the vehicle and switching off the lamps,

the low beams will come on for a brief period.

You can set the duration or deactivate the func-

tion via iDrive.

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the

controller.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Lamps

102

4. Select "Lighting" and press the controller.

5. Select "Pathway lighting" and press the

controller.

6. Turn the controller to select the desired

duration.

7. Press the controller to apply the setting.

Daytime running lamps*

If desired, the light switch can remain in posi-

tion 0, 1 or 3.

In position 0 and 3 the exterior lighting is auto-

matically switched off after the vehicle is

switched off. In position 1 the parking lamps

light up after the ignition is switched off.

Switch on the parking lamps if required as

described under Parking lamps.

Adaptive Head Light*

The concept

Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlamp

control system that enables better illumination

of the road surface. Depending on the steering

angle and other parameters, the light from the

headlamp follows the course of the road.

Activating Adaptive Head Light

In switch position 3, the Adaptive Head Light is

active and the automatic headlamp control

is

switched on, refer to page 101.

To avoid dazzling oncoming traffic, the Adap-

tive Head Light is not active when driving in

reverse and points toward the passenger side

when the vehicle is stopped.

Malfunction

The LED next to the symbol for automatic head-

lamp control flashes. Adaptive Head Light is

malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system

checked as soon as possible.

High beams/

roadside parking lamps

1High beams

2Headlamp flasher

3Roadside parking lamps

Roadside parking lamps, left or right*

You also enjoy the option of lighting up just one

side of your vehicle when parking. When using

this function, comply with national regulations:

Switching on

After parking the vehicle, press the lever in the

desired direction 3, past the resistance point.

The roadside parking lamps drain the bat-

tery. Do not leave them switched on for

long periods of time, as otherwise it may no

longer be possible to start the engine.<

Switching off

Briefly press the lever in the opposite direc-

tion 3 up to the resistance point.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

103

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

High-beam assistant*

The concept

This system automatically switches the high

beams on and off again. A sensor on the front of

the inside rearview mirror controls the process.

The assistant ensures that the high beams are

switched on whenever the traffic situation

allows. This reduces the strain on you while at

the same time providing you with the best pos-

sible visibility. Of course, you can intervene at

any time and switch the high beams on and off

in the accustomed manner.

Activating high-beam assistant

1. Turn the light switch to switch position 3,

refer to page 101.

2. Press the turn signal lever in the high beam

direction with the low beams switched on.

The indicator lamp in the instrument

cluster lights up when the high-beam

assistant is activated. The assistant

automatically switches between high and low

beams, whereby the system reacts to oncom-

ing traffic and traffic ahead, as well as to suffi-

cient lighting, e.g. towns/cities.

Manually switching between high and

low beams

You can intervene at any time if you wish or the

situation requires.

>If the high-beam assistant has switched on

the high beams, however you nevertheless

want to use the low beams, simply switch to

the low beams with the turn signal lever.

The high-beam assistant is deactivated in

the process.

To reactivate the system, briefly press the

turn signal lever in the high beam direction

again.

>If the high-beam assistant has switched on

the low beams, however you nevertheless

want to use the high beams, switch to the

high beams in the accustomed manner. The

system is deactivated in the process and

you must switch to the low beams manually.

To reactivate the system, briefly press the

turn signal lever in the high beam direction

again.

>You use the headlamp flasher as usual with

low beams.

System limits

The high-beam assistant cannot replace

personal decisions on the benefits of

using the high beams. In situations which

require this, you should therefore switch to the

low beams manually to avoid a safety risk.<

In the following example situations, the system

does not operate or only with limitations and a

personal reaction may be required:

>Under extremely unfavorable weather con-

ditions, such as fog or heavy precipitation

>For perceiving road users with poor lighting

of their own, e.g. pedestrians, cyclists, peo-

ple on horseback, horse-drawn vehicles,

with train or ship traffic close to the road and

wild animals crossing the road

>In tight curves, on steep crowns or depres-

sions, with cross traffic or partially con-

cealed oncoming traffic on the freeway

>In poorly lit places and with highly reflective

signs

>In the low speed range

>When the windshield is fogged up, dirty or

covered with stickers, vignettes etc. in the

area of the inside rearview mirror

>When the sensor is dirty. Clean the sensor

on the front side of the inside rearview mir-

ror with a cloth moistened with a small

amount of glass cleaner

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Lamps

104

Fog lamps*

The parking lamps or low beams must be

switched on for the fog lamps to operate. The

green indicator lamp in the instrument cluster

lights up whenever the fog lamps are on.

The fog lamps are switched off whenever the

high beams are switched on.

If the automatic headlamp control is acti-

vated, the low beams will come on auto-

matically when you switch on the fog lamps.<

Instrument lighting

You can control the lighting intensity by using

the knurled wheel.

Interior lamps

The interior lamps, footwell lamps, door entry

lighting

and courtesy lamps

*

are controlled

automatically.

With the courtesy lamps, LED lights are located

in the door handles to illuminate the exterior

area before the doors.

To protect the battery, all lamps in the

vehicle are switched off approx. 15 min-

utes after radio readiness is switched off, refer

to Start/Stop button on page 58.<

Switching interior lamps on and off

manually

Press the button.

If you want the interior lamps to remain off con-

tinuously, maintain pressure on the button for

approx. 3 seconds.

Reading lamps

Reading lamps are located in the front and rear

adjacent to the interior lamps. Press the button

briefly to switch the lamps on and off.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

105

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Climate

Automatic climate control

1Airflow directed toward the windshield and

side windows

2Air for the upper body region, refer to

Front ventilation on page 108

3Air to footwell

4Temperature, left side of passenger

compartment

5Maximum cooling

6Defrosting windows and removing

condensation

7Air volume, manual

8Switching off automatic climate control

9Switching cooling function on and off

manually

10 Temperature, right side of passenger

compartment

11 Residual heat mode

12 AUTO program

13 AUC Automatic recirculated-air control/

recirculated-air mode

14 LED for parked car ventilation

*

15 Rear window defroster

16 Air grill for interior temperature sensor –

please keep clear and unobstructed

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Climate

106

The current setting for air distribution is dis-

played on the Control Display.

A congenial climate

The AUTO program offers the optimum air dis-

tribution and air volume for virtually all condi-

tions, refer to AUTO program below. Now you

only need to select an interior temperature

pleasant to you.

The following sections contain more detailed

information on the available setting options.

Most settings are stored for the remote control

currently in use, also refer to Personal Profile

settings on page 29.

AUTO program

The AUTO program handles the

adjustment of air distribution to the

windshield and side windows, in

the direction of the upper body, and in the foot-

well, as well as the air volume. It also adapts

your instructions for the temperature to outside

influences throughout the year.

The cooling is switched on automatically with

the AUTO program. At the same time, a con-

densation sensor controls the program in such

a way that window condensation is prevented

as much as possible.

Intensity of AUTO program

To meet your individual needs, you can weaken

or strengthen the intensity of the automatic cli-

mate control.

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-

mate".

3. Select "Automatic programs" and press the

controller.

4. Select the desired intensity and press the

controller.

The marked intensity of the automatic

program is switched on.

Temperature

Set the desired temperature indi-

vidually on the driver's and front

passenger side.

The automatic climate control

adjusts this temperature as quickly as possible

at any time of year, if necessary with the maxi-

mum cooling or heating capacity, and then

keeps it constant.

When switching between different tem-

perature settings in rapid succession, the

automatic climate control does not have suffi-

cient time to adjust the set temperature.<

Adjusting temperature in upper body

region

1. Open the start menu.

2. Open "Climate".

3. Select "Vent settings" and press the con-

troller.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

107

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

4. Select the field by moving the controller and

turning the controller to adjust the temper-

ature.

Defrosting windows and removing

condensation

Quickly remove ice and condensa-

tion from the windshield and front

side windows.

Rear window defroster

The rear window defroster

switches off automatically after a

while.

Air volume, manual

You can adjust the air volume by

turning. You can reactivate the

automatic mode for the air volume

with the AUTO button.

Manual air distribution

You can specify the air distribution.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Open "Climate".

3. Select "Vent settings" and press the con-

troller.

The driver's and front passenger side can

be adjusted separately with the fields on the

right or left side.

4. Select the driver's or front passenger side

if necessary.

Move the controller to the right or left

repeatedly until the driver's or front passen-

ger side is selected.

5. Select the desired field by moving the con-

troller.

6. Turn the controller to adjust the air distribu-

tion.

Driver's side:

1Airflow directed toward the windshield and

side windows

2Airflow for the upper body

3Air to footwell

Front passenger side:

4Airflow for the upper body

5Air to footwell

Pressing the AUTO button cancels the air

distribution settings on the Control Dis-

play and vice versa.<

Switching cooling function on and off

The cooling function cools and

dehumidifies the incoming air

before also reheating it as

required, according to the temperature setting.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may

fog over briefly when the engine is started.

The cooling function is switched on automati-

cally with the AUTO program. The passenger

compartment can only be cooled with the

engine running.

Maximum cooling

Maximally cooled air is obtained as

quickly as possible from an outside

temperature above 327/06 and

with the engine running.

The automatic climate control changes over to

the lowest temperature and switches into the

recirculated-air mode. The maximum air quan-

tity only flows out of the vents for the upper

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Climate

108

body. Therefore, open these vents for maxi-

mum cooling.

AUC Automatic recirculated-air

control/recirculated-air mode

You can respond to pollutants or

unpleasant odors in the immediate

environment by suspending the

supply of outside air. The system then recircu-

lates the air currently within the vehicle. During

AUC operation, a sensor detects pollutants in

the outside air and controls the shut-off auto-

matically.

By pressing the button repeatedly, you can

request three operating modes:

>LED off: outside air flows in continuously.

>Right LED on, AUC mode: the system

detects pollutants in the outside air and

shuts off the supply as needed.

>Left LED on, recirculated-air mode: the

supply of outside air is permanently shut off.

If condensation starts to form on the

inside window surfaces during operation

in the recirculated-air mode, you should switch

it off while also increasing the air volume as

required.

The recirculated-air mode should not be used

over an extended period of time, as the air qual-

ity inside the vehicle deteriorates continu-

ously.<

Residual heat

The heat stored in the engine is

used to heat the passenger com-

partment, e.g. while stopped at a

school to pick up a child.

The function can be switched on when the fol-

lowing conditions are met:

>up to 15 minutes after switching off the

engine

>with engine at operating temperature

>with sufficient battery voltage

>at an outside temperature below 777/

256

The LED lights up when the function is

switched on.

From radio readiness the interior temperature,

the air volume and the air distribution can be

set.

Switching off automatic climate control

The air volume, the heater and the

cooling function are all switched

off.

You can restart the automatic cli-

mate control by pressing any of its buttons

except the REST button.

Front ventilation

1Knurled wheels to smoothly open and close

air vents

2Levers to change the air vent direction

Do not drop any foreign objects into the

vent outlets, otherwise these could be

catapulted outwards and lead to injuries.<

Ventilation for cooling

Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool

air in your direction, for instance, if the interior

has become too warm, etc.

Draft-free ventilation

Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past

you and is not directed straight at you.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

109

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Rear ventilation

1Knurled wheel to smoothly open and close

air vents

2Knurled wheel to adjust the temperature:

>Turn toward blue: colder

>Turn toward red: warmer

3Levers to change the air vent direction

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

The microfilter removes dust and pollen from

the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter

provides additional protection by filtering gas-

eous pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW

center replaces this combined filter as a stan-

dard part of your scheduled maintenance.

You can select a display of more detailed infor-

mation on the Control Display, refer to page 77.

Parked car ventilation*

The concept

The parked car ventilation blows air into the

passenger compartment to lower interior tem-

peratures.

It is ready to use in the parked-car mode at any

outside temperature.

You can set two different times for the system

to start. The parked car ventilation can also be

switched on and off directly. It remains

switched on for 30 minutes.

Since the system uses a substantial amount of

electrical current, you should refrain from acti-

vating it twice in succession without allowing

the battery to be recharged in normal operation

between use.

The air emerges through the upper body region

vent outlets in the instrument panel. These vent

outlets must be open for the system to operate.

The parked car ventilation is operated via iDrive.

Switching on and off directly

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-

mate".

3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the

controller.

4. Select "Automatic ventilation" and press

the controller.

5. Select "Parked car ventilation" and press

the controller.

The parked-car ventilation is switched on.

The symbol on the display of the automatic

climate control flashes.

Preselecting activation times

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-

mate".

3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the

controller.

4. Select "Activation time" and press the con-

troller.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Climate

110

5. Move the controller to the left or right to

select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2".

6. Select the time and press the controller.

The first time setting is highlighted.

7. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

8. Press the controller to apply the setting.

The next setting is highlighted.

9. Make the remaining adjustments. After the

last adjustment, the time is stored.

Activating activation time

Move the controller to the left or right to select

"Timer 1" or "Timer 2" and press the controller.

The activation time is activated.

The symbol on the display of the automatic

climate control lights up.

The symbol on the display of the automatic

climate control flashes when the parked car

ventilation has switched on.

The parked car ventilation is only avail-

able for activation within the next

24 hours. Then it must be activated again.<

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

111

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Practical interior accessories

Integrated universal remote

control*

The concept

The integrated universal remote control can

replace as many as three hand-held transmit-

ters for various remote-controlled accessories,

such as door openers and house alarm sys-

tems. The integrated universal remote control

registers and stores signals from the original

hand-held transmitters.

The signal of an original hand-held transmitter

can be programmed on one of the three mem-

ory buttons 1. Then with the ignition switched

on, this programmed memory button 1 can be

used to operate the respective feature. The

LED 2 flashes to confirm transmission of the

signal.

Should you sell your vehicle one day, be sure to

delete the stored programs beforehand for your

safety, refer to page 112.

To prevent possible damage or injury,

before programming or using the inte-

grated universal remote control, always inspect

the immediate area to make certain that no peo-

ple, animals or objects are within the travel

range of the device. Also, comply with the

safety precautions of the original hand-held

transmitter.<

Checking compatibility

If you see this symbol on the packaging

or in the manual supplied with the orig-

inal hand-held transmitter, it is safe to

assume that it is compatible with the integrated

universal remote control.

If you have additional questions, please

contact your BMW center or call:

1-800-355-3515.

Information is also provided on the Internet at:

www.bmwusa.com or

www.homelink.com.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson

Controls, Inc.<

Programming

1Memory buttons

2LED

Fixed-code hand-held transmitters

1. Switch on ignition, refer to page 58.

2. When starting operation for the first time:

Press both outer memory buttons 1 for

approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes.

All stored programs are deleted.

3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a

distance of approx. 2in/5cm to 8in/20cm

from the memory buttons 1.

The required distance between the

hand-held transmitter and the mem-

ory buttons 1 depends on the relevant sys-

tem of the original hand-held transmitter

used.<

4. Simultaneously press the transmit key on

the original hand-held transmitter and the

desired memory button 1 on the integrated

universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes

slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes

rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2

does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 sec-

onds, alter the distance.

5. To program other original hand-held trans-

mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Practical interior accessories

112

The corresponding memory button 1 is now

programmed with the signal of the original

hand-held transmitter.

You can operate the system when the engine is

running or when the ignition is switched on.

If the device can not be used after

repeated programming, check whether

the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter-

nating-code system. To do so, either read the

instructions for the original hand-held transmit-

ter or hold down the programmed memory

button 1 of the integrated universal remote

control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal

remote control flashes rapidly for a short time

and then remains lit for approx. 2 seconds, this

indicates that the original hand-held transmitter

uses an alternating-code system. In the case of

an alternating-code system, program the mem-

ory buttons 1 as described at Alternating-code

transmitters.<

Alternating-code transmitters

To program the integrated universal remote

control, consult the operating instructions for

the equipment to be set. You will find informa-

tion there on the possibilities for synchroniza-

tion.

When programming hand-held transmitters

that employ an alternating code, please observe

the following supplementary instructions:

Programming will be easier with the aid of

a second person.<

1. Park your vehicle within the range of the

remote-controlled device.

2. Program the integrated universal remote

control as described above in the section

Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.

3. Locate the button on the receiver of the

device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.

4. Press the button on the receiver of the

device to be set. After step 4, you have

approx. 30 seconds for step 5.

5. Press the programmed memory button 1

of the integrated universal remote control

three times.

The corresponding memory button 1 is now

programmed with the signal of the original

hand-held transmitter.

If you have any additional questions,

please contact your BMW center.<

Deleting stored programs

Press both outer memory buttons 1 for approx.

20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes:

All stored programs are deleted.

Individual programs cannot be deleted.

Sun blinds*

Sun blind for rear window

Press the button on the driver's door.

Sun blinds for rear side windows

Pull the loop of the roller sun blind and hook

onto bracket.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

113

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Glove compartment

Opening

Pull the handle. The light in the glove compart-

ment switches on.

To prevent injury in the event of an acci-

dent while the vehicle is being driven,

close the glove compartment immediately after

use.<

Closing

Fold the cover up.

Locking

Lock with a key.

If you only hand over the remote control

without the integrated key, e.g. for valet

parking, refer to page 28, the glove compart-

ment cannot be unlocked.<

Rechargeable flashlight

The flashlight is located on the left side of the

glove compartment.

The flashlight can remain plugged in continu-

ously. Pull the flashlight out of the socket when

needed.

To avoid possibly damaging the lamp,

always ensure that it is switched off

before inserting it in the socket.<

Front center armrest

The compartment is the center armrest is

divided into two sections.

Opening cover

Press the button. The cover opens somewhat

and can be folded upwards.

Depending on vehicle equipment, the upper

section contains a compartment with a mat that

can be removed for cleaning or a telephone

cradle

*

.

Opening upper compartment

Press button and fold cover upward.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Practical interior accessories

114

Accessing lower compartment

Press the button at the front and fold the upper

compartment or the telephone cradle upward.

Ventilating lower compartment

Push the slide in the lower compartment

upward.

Depending on the automatic climate con-

trol setting, the temperature inside the

ventilated compartment may be higher than in

the rest of the interior. Should this be the case,

push the slide downward to close off the venti-

lation.<

Adjusting

Push the illustrated section of the center arm-

rest into the desired position.

Connection for external audio device

You can connect an external audio device, e.g. a

CD or an MP3 player, and play the sound via the

vehicle loudspeakers, refer to page 171.

Storage compartments

There are other storage compartments in the

doors as well as in the front and rear center con-

sole.

Storage nets are located on the backrests of the

front seats, and a net

*

is provided in the front

passenger footwell.

Do not stow hard or sharp-edged objects

in the storage nets or the net, otherwise

there is an increased risk of injury in an acci-

dent.<

Clothes hooks

Clothes hooks are located near the grab han-

dles in the rear.

When hanging clothing on the hooks,

ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's

vision. Do not hang heavy objects on the hooks.

If you do so, they could cause personal injury to

occupants during braking or evasive maneu-

vers.<

Cup holders

Do not place containers made of glass in

the cup holders. This would lead to an

increased risk of injury in the event of an acci-

dent.<

Opening

Briefly press the button.

Closing

Press the cover in the center and push in the

cup holder.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

115

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Ashtray, front

Opening

Slide back the cover.

Emptying

Push the ashtray toward the front: the ashtray

lifts and can be removed.

Cigarette lighter, front

Press in the lighter with the engine running or

the ignition switched on.

The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops

back out.

Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by

the knob only. Holding or touching it in

other areas could result in burns.

Always take along the remote control when you

leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for

example, use the lighter and burn themselves.<

Ashtray, rear

Emptying

Press the entire cover down. The ashtray rises

and can be removed.

Cigarette lighter, rear

Refer to Cigarette lighter, front.

Connecting electrical devices

Sockets

With the engine running or the ignition switched

on, the cigarette lighter socket can be used as a

power outlet for hand flashlights, car vacuum

cleaners, etc., with power ratings of up to

approx. 200 W at 12 V. Avoid damaging the

socket due to inserting plugs of different

shapes or sizes. The same is true for all power

outlets in the vehicle.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Practical interior accessories

116

In front passenger footwell

Access to socket:

Fold open the cover.

Sedan:

In luggage compartment

Access to socket:

Fold open the cover.

Sports Wagon:

In cargo area

Access to socket:

Fold open the cover.

Center armrest, rear

Storage tray:

Pull the cover upward, arrow 1.

Access to cup holders:

Press the button 2 and open the cover

Sedan:

Through-loading system*

Opening

1. Open the buckle of the center safety belt in

the rear and insert the latch plate at the end

of the belt into the fixture on the rear win-

dow shelf.

2. Push the corresponding head restraint

down as far as it will go, refer to page 49.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

117

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

3. To unlock the rear seat back, pull the corre-

sponding lever in the luggage compart-

ment.

4. The unlocked rear seat back moves forward

slightly. Fold the seat back forward by the

head restraint.

Closing

1. Fold the rear seat back into the seating

position and engage.

When you return the seat to its upright

position, make sure that the retainer

engages properly. If it is not properly engaged,

transported cargo could enter the vehicle dur-

ing braking or evasive maneuvers and endanger

the vehicle occupants.<

2. Release the latch plate from the bracket on

the rear window shelf and insert it into the

buckle of the center safety belt. The latch

plate must audibly engage.

The lashing eyes in the luggage compartment

provide you with a way to attach luggage com-

partment nets

*

or flexible straps for securing

suitcases and luggage, refer to page 128.

Sports Wagon: cargo area

Roll-up cover

Pull out the roll-up cover and hook it into the

brackets.

Do not place heavy or hard objects on the

roll-up cover. If you do so, they may

already pose a danger to vehicle occupants dur-

ing braking or evasive maneuvers.

Do not allow the roll-up cover to snap back, as

otherwise it can be damaged.<

Manual roll-up cover

When opening the tailgate or rear window, the

roll-up cover is raised. Before closing the tail-

gate and rear window, press down the roll-up

cover until it engages.

Automatic roll-up cover*

When the tailgate or rear window is opened, the

roll-up cover is raised, and when the tailgate

and rear window is closed, it is lowered.

Make sure that the closing area of the roll-

up cover is clear of obstructions, as other-

wise the payload or the roll-up cover may be

damaged.<

Increasing cargo area

The rear seat back is divided. You can fold over

both sides individually to increase the cargo

area.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Practical interior accessories

118

Reach into the recess and pull toward the front.

When you fold back the backrest, be sure

that the catch engages securely. The red

warning indicator disappears in the recess

when the catch is engaged. If it is not properly

engaged, transported cargo could enter the

passenger compartment during braking or eva-

sive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle occu-

pants.<

To ensure that the safety systems con-

tinue to provide optimized protection,

please observe the safety belt information on

page 45.<

Separation net

Do not allow the separation net to snap

back, otherwise there is a risk of injury

and the separation net may be damaged.<

With normal cargo area

Pull the separation net out of the case by the

loop. Grasp the rod on both sides and insert it in

the brackets, arrow 1. This is best carried out

from the rear seat.

When you no longer required the separation

net, grasp the rod on both sides and remove it

from the brackets, arrow 2. Then slowly allow

the separation net to glide into the case.

With larger cargo area

1. Fold over both rear backrests, refer to

Increasing cargo area.

2. Unlock the case on both sides with the but-

tons, arrow 1.

3. Pull out the case downward, arrow 2; avoid

tilting when doing so.

4. Push the case into the guides on the back of

the seat backrests.

5. Carefully pull out the separation net and

insert it in the front brackets as described in

With normal cargo area. This is best carried

out from the front seat.

To restore the original state, proceed in the

reverse order. Finally, lay the case in the two

side brackets and then press forward until it

engages. The red warning indicator disappears

in the recess when the catch is engaged. Check

whether the case is properly locked in place by

pulling it with a sudden movement.

Compartment in floor

Automatic roll-up cover: the opened floor panel

strikes against the roll-up cover in the end posi-

tion. If necessary, unhook the roll-up cover at

the rear before opening the floor panel.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

119

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Opening: reach into the recess and swing up

the handle.

The floor panel flap can be locked.

The partitions in the compartment can be rear-

ranged.

Folding up spare tire cover

1. Swing up the cover.

2. Detach the hook from the bracket and hook

into the floor panel flap.

Before swinging down, return the hook to its

original position.

Storage area package*

Retaining straps

You can unhook the right-hand retaining strap,

e.g. to open the side panel. To unhook at the

rear end, pull downward; to hook in, press it into

the opening. In addition, it can also be secured

in the center. This makes it possible to secure

objects of different sizes.

Hooks

Two hooks can be used to secure smaller

objects.

Press at bottom and fold out until they lock.

Compartments in floor

Front compartment:

>To open the front floor panel flap, pull

upward on the handle.

>To close the front floor panel flap, press

downward until it locks.

Rear compartment:

To open, reach into the recess and swing up the

handle.

The rear floor panel flap can be locked.

Dividing up rear compartment

Fold out the partitions and press down.

Use the separation net, refer to page 118,

otherwise objects could be thrown

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Practical interior accessories

120

around and endanger occupants, e.g. during

braking or evasive maneuvers.<

Ski bag*

Designed for safe, clean transport of up to

4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snowboards.

With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length

of up to 6.9 ft/2.10 m. When skis of 6.9 ft/2.10 m

in length are loaded, the ski bag will tend to con-

tract, reducing its overall capacity.

Loading

1. Fold down the center armrest, press the

button and open the cover.

2. Press the button again; the cover in the lug-

gage compartment opens. If you press the

button firmly the first time, this also opens

the cover in the luggage compartment.

3. Extend the ski bag between the front seats

and fill it. The zipper facilitates access to the

stowed items and drying of the ski bag.

4. Insert the latch plate of the ski bag retaining

strap into the center safety belt buckle that

is marked CENTER.

Only stow clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp

edges to prevent damage.

Securing cargo

After loading, secure the ski bag and its con-

tents. Tighten the retaining strap on the ten-

sioning buckle for this purpose.

Secure the ski bag in this way. If you fail to

do so, it could endanger occupants dur-

ing braking or evasive maneuvers.<

To store the ski bag, perform the above steps in

reverse order.

Removing ski bag

The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g. for

faster drying or to allow you to put it to other

uses.

1. Pull the handle forward and pull the ski bag

up and out.

2. Close the cover in the luggage compart-

ment.

Your BMW center will be glad to provide

you with more detailed information on the

various items of equipment.<

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls

121

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Driving tips

This section is designed to provide you

with extra support by supplying information

useful in dealing with specific driving

and operating conditions.

Driving tips

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Things to remember when driving

124

Things to remember when driving

Break-in period

Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to

each other. To ensure that your vehicle contin-

ues to provide optimized economy of operation

throughout an extended service life, we request

that you devote careful attention to the follow-

ing section.

Engine and differential

Always obey all official speed limits.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km

Drive at changing engine and driving speeds,

however do not exceed 4,500 rpm or 100 mph/

160 km/h.

Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the

transmission's kick-down mode during these

initial miles.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km

The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be

increased.

SMG Sequential Manual Transmission

Do not use the acceleration assistant during the

break-in period, refer to page 63.

Tires

Due to technical factors associated with their

manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac-

tion potential until after an initial break-in

period. Therefore, drive reservedly during the

first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system

Brakes require an initial break-in period of

approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized

contact and wear patterns between brake pads

and rotors. Drive in a reserved manner during

this break-in period.

Clutch

The function of the clutch is only at its opti-

mized level after a distance driven of approx.

300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,

engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement

Observe the break-in instructions again if com-

ponents mentioned above must be replaced

after subsequent driving operation.

General driving notes

Closing luggage compartment lid/

tailgate

Operate the vehicle only when the lug-

gage compartment lid/tailgate is com-

pletely closed. Otherwise, exhaust fumes could

enter the interior of the vehicle.<

If special circumstances should make it abso-

lutely necessary to operate the vehicle with the

luggage compartment lid/tailgate open:

1. Close all windows and the glass sunroof or

panorama glass sunroof.

2. Increase the air volume of the automatic cli-

mate control to a high level, refer to

page 107.

Hot exhaust system

As in all vehicles, extremely high temper-

atures are generated on the exhaust sys-

tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed

adjacent to it, and never apply undercoating to

them. When driving, standing at idle and while

parking take care to avoid possible contact

between the hot exhaust system and any highly

flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass,

etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it

the risk of serious property damage as well as

personal injury.<

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Driving tips

125

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Mobile communications devices in

vehicle

BMW discourages the use of mobile

communications devices, e.g. mobile

phones, inside the vehicle without a direct con-

nection to an outside antenna. Otherwise, the

vehicle electronics and mobile communication

device can influence one another. In addition,

there is no assurance that the radiation which

results from transmission will be dissipated

from the vehicle interior.<

Interior and exterior mirrors,

automatic dimming feature*

This feature is controlled by two photocells in

the inside rearview mirror. One is integrated into

the glass of the mirror, while the other is located

at an offset position on the rear of the mirror

housing.

For trouble-free operation, keep the photocells

clean and do not cover the area between the

interior rearview mirror and the windshield. Do

not attach stickers of any kind to the windshield

in front of the mirror, either.

Hydroplaning

When driving on wet or slushy roads,

reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge

of water can form between tires and road sur-

face. This phenomenon is referred to as hydro-

planing, and is characterized by a partial or

complete loss of contact between the tires and

the road surface, ultimately undermining your

ability to steer and brake the vehicle.<

The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tread

depth of the tires decreases, refer also to Mini-

mum tire tread on page 201.

Driving through water

Do not drive through water on the road if it

is deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only at

walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the vehi-

cle's engine, the electrical systems and the

transmission may be damaged.<

Using handbrake on inclines

On inclines, do not hold the vehicle with

the clutch; use the handbrake. Otherwise

greater clutch wear will result.<

SMG Sequential Manual Transmission

Start off quickly on slopes. Do not hold

the vehicle on a hill by pressing the accel-

erator, but apply the handbrake instead. Other-

wise overheating can occur in the transmission

region.<

Starting assistant

The starting assistant enables you to start off

conveniently on slopes. The parking brake is

not required for this purpose.

1. Hold the vehicle with the footbrake.

2. Release the footbrake and immediately

drive off quickly.

The starting assistant holds the vehicle

for approx. 2 seconds after releasing the

footbrake. Depending on the load, the vehicle

may also roll back slightly during this time.

After releasing the footbrake, immediately start

quickly, otherwise the starting assistant no

longer holds the vehicle after approx. 2 seconds

and it begins to roll back.<

Braking safely

Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard

feature. In situations that require it, it is best to

brake with full force. Since the vehicle maintains

steering responsiveness, you can still avoid

possible obstacles with a minimum of steering

effort.

Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with

sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that

ABS is in its active mode.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Things to remember when driving

126

Do not drive with your foot resting on the

brake pedal. Even light but consistent

pedal pressure can lead to high temperatures,

brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<

Driving in wet conditions

When roads are wet or there is heavy rain,

briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal

every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to

ensure that this maneuver does not endanger

other road users. The heat generated in this

process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure

that full braking efficiency will then be available

when you need it.

Hills

To prevent overheating and the resulting

reduced efficiency of the brake system,

drive long or steep downhill gradients in the

gear in which the least braking is required. Even

light but consistent pressure on the brake pedal

can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and

possibly even brake failure.<

The braking effect of the engine can be further

increased by downshifting, if necessary all the

way down into first gear. This strategy helps

you avoid placing excessive loads on the brake

system. For information on downshifting in the

manual mode of the automatic transmission,

refer to page 64.

Do not drive with the clutch depressed, in

idle or with the engine switched off, other-

wise there will be no engine braking action or

support of the braking force and steering.

Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other

objects to protrude into the area of movement

of the pedals and impair their operation.<

Corrosion on brake rotors

When the vehicle is driven only occasionally,

during extended periods when the vehicle is not

used at all, and in operating conditions where

brake applications are less frequent, there is an

increased tendency for corrosion to form on

rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the

brake pads. This occurs because the minimum

pressure which must be exerted by the pads

during brake applications to clean the rotors is

not reached.

Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the

brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating

effect that even extended application will fail to

cure.

When vehicle is parked

Condensation forms in the air conditioner sys-

tem during operation, and then exits under the

vehicle. Traces of condensed water under the

vehicle are therefore normal.

Before driving into a car wash

To prevent the exterior mirrors on this vehicle

from being damaged, always fold them in by

hand before entering an automatic car wash.

General information on the care and mainte-

nance of your BMW is contained in the Caring

for your vehicle brochure.

Rear window wiper*

The rear window wiper can be damaged in car

washes. Take appropriate protective measures;

ask the car wash operator if necessary.

With comfort access and automatic

transmission

Insert the remote control into the ignition lock.

The engine can be switched off in the selector

lever position N. Also refer to page 40.

Cargo loading

To avoid loading the tires beyond their

approved carrying capacity, never over-

load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over-

heating and increases the rate at which damage

develops inside the tires. The ultimate result

can assume the form of a sudden blow-out.<

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Driving tips

127

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Determining loading limit

1. Locate the following statement on your

vehicle's placard

*

:

The combined weight of occupants

and cargo should never exceed

XXX lbs. or YYY kg. Otherwise, this could

damage the vehicle and produce unstable

vehicle operating conditions.<

2. Determine the combined weight of the

driver and passengers that will be riding in

your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver

and passengers from XXX lbs. or YYY kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the available

amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.

For example, if the XXX amount equals

1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150-lb. pas-

sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-

able cargo and luggage load capacity is

650 lbs.:

1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage

and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That

weight may not safely exceed the available

cargo and luggage load capacity calculated

in step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of

the load from your trailer will be transferred

to your vehicle. Consult the manual for

transporting a trailer to determine how this

may reduce the available cargo and luggage

load capacity of your vehicle.

Load

The permissible load is the total of the weight of

occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the

weight of occupants, the less cargo/luggage

can be transported.

Stowing cargo

>Load heavy cargo as far forward and as low

as possible, placing it directly behind the

seat back.

>Cover sharp edges and corners.

>For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is

not occupied, secure each safety belt in the

opposite buckle.

>Do not pile objects higher than the top edge

of the backrest.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Things to remember when driving

128

>Sports Wagon:

Use the separation net to protect the occu-

pants, refer to page 118. Make sure that

objects cannot penetrate through the sepa-

ration net.

Wrap sharp-edged or pointed objects

which could strike the rear window while

driving.

Securing cargo

>Use the luggage net

*

, luggage straps, or

securing straps to hold down small and

lightweight luggage and cargo.

>Heavy-duty cargo straps

*

for securing

larger and heavier objects are available at

your BMW center. Four lashing eyes

mounted in the luggage compartment or

cargo area are used to secure these heavy-

duty cargo straps, refer to illustration.

>Please observe the special instructions

supplied with the heavy-duty cargo straps.

Always position and secure the load as

described above. If you do not, it can

endanger the passengers during braking or

evasive maneuvers.

Use only the lashing eyes to secure heavy-duty

cargo straps, refer to illustration, otherwise the

cargo straps could become detached or the

vehicle could be damaged.

Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle

weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer

to page 229 ff., as excessive loads can pose a

safety hazard, and may also place you in viola-

tion of traffic safety laws.

You should never transport heavy or hard

objects unsecured in the passenger compart-

ment, as they could fly around and pose a safety

hazard to the vehicle's occupants during abrupt

braking or evasive maneuvers.<

Roof-mounted luggage rack*

A special rack system is available as an option

for your BMW. Please comply with the precau-

tions included with the installation instructions.

Mounting points

The mounting points are located in the door

openings or on the roof rails

*

.

Loading roof-mounted luggage rack

Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of

gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on

its handling and steering response.

You should therefore always remember not to

exceed the approved roof load capacity, the

approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads

when loading the rack.

You can find the specified weights under

Weights on page 229 ff.

The load on the roof must be evenly distributed

and must not extend outward beyond the limits

of the loading surface. Always stow the heaviest

pieces at the bottom. Be sure that adequate

clearance is maintained for raising the glass

sunroof, and that objects do not project into the

opening path of the luggage compartment lid/

tailgate.

Secure roof-mounted cargo correctly and

securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off

during the trip.

Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and

braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Driving tips

129

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Navigation

This chapter describes how you can

enter destinations and specify your route

so that your navigation system guides you

reliably to your destination.

Navigation

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Starting navigation system

132

Starting navigation system

Your navigation system can use satellites to

ascertain the precise position of your vehicle

and guide you reliably to any destination you

enter.

Navigation DVD

The navigation system requires a special navi-

gation DVD. The latest version is available at

your BMW center.

Inserting navigation DVD

1. Insert the navigation DVD with the labeled

side up. The DVD is automatically pulled in.

2. Allow several seconds for the system to

scan the data from the DVD.

Removing navigation DVD

1. Press button 1.

The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.

2. Remove the DVD.

If the DVD is not ejected from the drive, it is pos-

sible that it is blocked. A message appears on

the Control Display.

Display in assistance window

You can display the route or the current position

in the assistance window. This display remains

visible even if you change to another applica-

tion.

1. Move the controller to the right to enter the

assistance window.

2. Press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

3. Select the desired route view or "Current

position".

4. Press the controller.

*

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Navigation Driving tips

133

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility

Destination entry

In entering your destination you can select from

among the following options:

>Entering a destination manually, see below

>Entering destination via voice*, refer to

page 136

>Selecting destination using information,

refer to page 138

>Selecting destination from a list, refer to

Destination list, page 139

>Selecting destination from address book,

refer to page 140

>Selecting home address, refer to page 142

After selecting your destination you can pro-

ceed to start the destination guidance, refer to

page 144.

Operating navigation system

Enter data only when the vehicle is sta-

tionary, and always give priority to the

applicable traffic regulations in the event of any

contradiction between traffic and road condi-

tions and the instructions issued by the naviga-

tion system. If you do not observe this precau-

tion, you may be in violation of the law, and can

endanger vehicle occupants and other road

users.<

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the right to open

"Navigation".

3. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

Entering a destination

manually

The system's word matching principle makes it

easier for you to enter the names of streets or

towns, refer to page 143. This allows you to

enter different spellings and completes your

entry automatically so that stored names can be

called up quickly.

1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the

controller until "Navigation" is selected and

press the controller.

"New destination" is selected.

2. Press the controller.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Destination entry

134

3. Select "Enter address" and press the con-

troller.

The system also supports you with the follow-

ing features:

>If you do not enter a street, the system will

guide you to the downtown area of a town or

city.

>You can skip the entry of country and local-

ity if the current entries should be retained

for your new destination.

Selecting country

1. Select "State / Province" or the displayed

country and press the controller.

The list of available countries appears on

the display.

2. Select the country of destination and press

the controller.

In order to be able to start the destination guid-

ance, at least the town/city of the destination or

its zip code must be entered.

Entering destination via town/city

name

1. Select "Town / City" or the displayed town/

city and press the controller.

2. Select the starting letter and press control-

ler.

A list of all towns/cities starting with this let-

ter appears on the Control Display.

3. To delete the letter entered if necessary:

>Delete individual numbers or letters:

Move the controller toward the right to

select , and press the controller.

>Delete all numbers or letters:

Move the controller toward the right to

select , and hold the controller

down.

4. If necessary, input more letters.

The list gradually grows smaller each time

you enter a new letter.

>Enter blank space if necessary:

Select the symbol and press the con-

troller.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Navigation Driving tips

135

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility

5. Change to the third field from the top if nec-

essary. Turn the controller until the town or

city name is selected from the list and press

the controller.

Entering destination by zip code

1. Select "Town / City" and press the control-

ler.

2. Enter the zip code:

Select the desired digits and press the con-

troller.

>Enter a blank space:

Select the symbol and press the con-

troller.

>Delete individual numbers or letters:

Move the controller toward the right to

select , and press the controller.

>Delete all numbers or letters:

Move the controller toward the right to

select , and hold the controller

down.

3. Select the zip code and press the controller.

The corresponding destination is displayed.

4. Change into the third field from the top.

Turn the controller until the destination is

selected and press the controller.

Entering street, house number and

intersection

After the street you can also enter the intersec-

tion or the house number.

Entering street and intersection

1. Select "Street" or the displayed street and

press the controller.

2. Enter the street.

The street is entered exactly like the desti-

nation.

The intersection is entered in the same way as

the street.

Entering a street without entering

destination

You can also enter a street without entering a

destination. In this case all streets of the

entered country are offered for selection. The

related town/city is displayed after the street

name.

If a town/city has already been entered, you can

undo this entry. This may be practical if the

desired street does not exist in the entered des-

tination, because, for example, it belongs to

another part of the town/city.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Destination entry

136

1. Change to upper field.

The arrow is selected.

2. Turn the controller to the right until the

request for the entry of a street in the coun-

try appears and press the controller.

3. Change to the second field from the top and

enter the street.

Entering house number

All house numbers stored for the street on the

navigation DVD can be entered.

1. Select "House number" and press the con-

troller.

2. Enter the house number:

Select the desired digits and press the con-

troller.

3. Change into the third field from the top.

Turn the controller until the house number

is selected and press the controller.

Starting destination guidance with

manual destination entry

>Select "Start guidance" and press the con-

troller.

Destination guidance starts immediately.

>If the destination guidance does not need to

be started immediately:

Select "Add to destination list" and press

the controller.

The destination is saved in the destination

list, refer to page 139.

Entering destination via

voice*

In conjunction with the Professional navigation

system, you can enter the desired destination

via the voice input system. When entering the

destination, it is possible to change between

speech input and iDrive at any time. Reactivate

the speech input function for this purpose if

necessary.

With {Options} you can have the possible

commands read aloud.<

1. Press the button on the steering wheel

or in the center console.

2. {Enter address}

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Navigation Driving tips

137

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility

Selecting country

Say the name of the destination country in the

language of the voice input system.

Entering destination

To enter the destination, spell it using the

orthography of the country of destination.

Say the letters smoothly and at normal volume,

avoiding excessive emphasis and pauses.

The system can suggest up to 20 desti-

nations that match your entries. Up to

6 entries are displayed at once on the Con-

trol Display.

The town/city can also be selected from the list

via iDrive:

Turn the controller until the destination is

selected and press the controller.

Entering street and house number

The street is entered in the same way as the

destination.

To enter the house number:

Up to 4-digit house numbers can be entered.

Starting destination guidance

Destination guidance starts immediately.

Saving destination

The destination is added to the destination list

or can be saved in the address book.

Map-guided destination

selection

If you only know the location of the town or

street of the destination, then you can input the

destination by using a map. You can use the

cursor to select the destination on the map and

then adopt it into the destination guidance.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

"New destination" is selected.

2. Press the controller.

Say country of destination.

1. Spell town/city name:

Say at least the first three letters of the

destination. The more letters you say,

the more exactly the system recognizes

the town/city.

A destination is suggested by the system.

2. Select location:

Select {Yes}

or

Select other town/city:

{No}

Select entry, e.g. {Entry 3}

The following options are available:

{Next page}: additional entries of the

list are displayed.

{Repeat}: the town/city can be

respelled.

Say the house number.

{Start guidance}

{Add to destination list} or

{Add to address book}

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Destination entry

138

3. Select "Input map" and press the controller.

A section of a map is displayed on the Con-

trol Display:

>During destination guidance, around the

current destination

>With the destination guidance deacti-

vated, around the last destination

entered

4. Select destination with cursor.

>Changing scale: turn the controller.

>Moving map: move the controller in the

corresponding direction.

The controller can be moved to the left,

right, forward, backwards and also diag-

onally.

5. To apply or save the destination in the des-

tination guidance system, press the con-

troller.

The selected destination and other menu

items are displayed.

6. Select the desired menu item:

>"Start route guidance" starts destination

guidance.

>"Show current position" places the cur-

rent position in the center of the map.

>"Show destination position" places the

current destination in the center of the

map.

>"Return to map" changes back to the

"Input map".

> Exit the menu.

7. Press the controller.

The map for the destination entry can also be

displayed in the map display:

Select the symbol and press the controller.

Selecting destination using

information

You can obtain a display of selected destina-

tions, e.g. hotels, sights or hospitals, and adopt

them into the destination guidance.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

"New destination" is selected.

2. Press the controller.

3. Select "Information" and press the control-

ler.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Navigation Driving tips

139

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility

4. Select location:

>"On destination"

>"On location"

>"On a new destination"

5. Press the controller.

6. Make your selection, e.g. "Hotels and res-

taurants", and press the controller.

These destinations are displayed on the

Control Display.

7. Select a destination and press the control-

ler.

8. Select a menu item:

>To accept the address into the destina-

tion list and start the destination guid-

ance:

Select "Select as destination" and press

the controller.

>To establish a telephone connection:

Select "Call" and press the controller.

To exit from the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Destination list

The last 20 entered destinations are shown in

the destination list. You can display these desti-

nations and apply them in the destination guid-

ance system.

For example, to plan a longer route, you can

store all destinations you want to drive to in

advance in the destination list, refer to Entering

a destination manually on page 133.

Select "Navigation" and press the controller.

The last destination entered is the first item in

the destination list.

This symbol indicates the current destina-

tion during destination guide.

To display additional destinations from the des-

tination list:

Turn the controller.

Applying destination in destination

guidance system

1. Select the desired destination and press

the controller.

2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-

troller.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Destination entry

140

Editing destination list

1. Select the desired destination in the desti-

nation list and press the controller.

2. The selected destination can be edited:

>Save entry:

Select "Add to address book".

>Display information on destination:

Select "Information on destination".

>Delete entry:

Select "Delete entry".

>Delete all entries:

Select "Delete list". The destination

guidance is switched off.

>Change entry:

Select "Edit". For operation, refer to

Entering destination via town/city name,

page 134.

3. Press the controller.

Address book

Opening address book

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

Select "Address book" and press the controller.

Storing destinations in address book

You can store approx. 100 destinations in the

address book.

1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.

2. Select "New address" and press the con-

troller.

3. Select "Enter address" and press the con-

troller.

4. Enter name and address.

5. Select "Store in address book" and press

the controller.

The entry is stored in the address book.

You can also save a destination from the desti-

nation list into the address book, refer to

page 139.

Storing current position*

The current position can be adopted into the

address book.

1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.

2. Change into the third field from the top.

Turn the controller until "New address" is

selected and press the controller.

3. Select "Use current location as address"

and press the controller.

The name given can be changed. For oper-

ation, refer to Entering a destination manu-

ally, page 133.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Navigation Driving tips

141

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility

4. Select "Store in address book" and press

the controller.

You can also enter your current position into the

address book if you have left the sector covered

by the navigation DVD. In this case, you must

enter a name.

Selecting destinations from address

book

1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.

The stored entries appear on the Control

Display.

2. Select the entry and press the controller.

To start the destination guidance:

Select "Start guidance" and press the control-

ler.

Changing destinations from address

book

1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.

2. Select the entry and press the controller.

3. Select "Edit address" and press the con-

troller.

4. Change entry.

For operation, refer to Entering a destina-

tion manually, page 133.

Deleting individual destinations from

address book

1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.

2. Select the entry and press the controller.

3. Select "Delete address" and press the con-

troller.

Deleting all destinations from address

book

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the

controller.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Destination entry

142

4. Select "Delete data" and press the control-

ler.

5. Select "Delete address book" and press the

controller.

6. Select "Yes" and press the controller.

Storing home address

You can save your current position or the cur-

rent destination as the home address in the

address book. This entry occupies the second

position in the address book.

1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.

2. Change into the third field from the top.

Turn the controller until "Home address" is

selected and press the controller.

3. Select "Use current location as address", or

"Save current destination" during the desti-

nation guidance, and press the controller.

To accept the home address as the destination:

1. Select "Home address" and press the con-

troller.

2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-

troller.

To change the entry:

1. Select "Home address" and press the con-

troller.

2. Select "Edit address" and press the con-

troller. For operation, refer to Entering a

destination manually, page 133.

Selecting route

You can influence the calculated route by

choosing certain route criteria. You can change

the route criteria as often as you like while

entering the destination and whenever the des-

tination guidance is active.

The route is planned according to fixed rules.

The type of road is taken into account, e.g.

whether it is a highway or a winding road. The

road types are stored on the navigation DVD.

As a result, the routes recommended by the

navigation system may not always be the same

ones that you would choose based on personal

experience.

Changing route criteria

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Change into the third field from the top.

Turn the controller until "Route preference"

is selected and press the controller.

The various criteria are listed on the Control

Display.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Navigation Driving tips

143

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility

3. Select a route criterion for the route:

>"With highways"

Freeways and major traffic arteries are

given priority

>"Avoid highways"

Freeways are avoided where possible

>"Fast route"

The short traveling time, being a combi-

nation of the shortest possible route and

the fastest roads

>"Short route"

Short route, irrespective of how fast or

slow progress will be

4. Press the controller.

The route criterion is highlighted.

5. If necessary, select an additional route cri-

terion and then press the controller:

>"Avoid tollroads"

Tollroads are avoided where possible.

>"Avoid ferries"

Ferries are avoided where possible.

To exit the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

The route criteria can also be changed in the

map view:

1. Select the symbol for the route criterion and

press the controller.

2. Select a route criterion and press the con-

troller.

Word matching principle

The system supports the word matching princi-

ple to make it easier for you to enter the names

of streets or towns. The system runs ongoing

checks, comparing your destination entries

with the data stored on the navigation DVD as

the basis for instant response. The user bene-

fits include:

>Names of specific locations can also vary

from the official versions if you are using a

spelling that is customary in another coun-

try.

Example:

Instead of "München", you can also enter

the English spelling "Munich" or the Italian

spelling "Monaco".

>When you are entering the names of towns

and streets the system will complete them

automatically as soon as enough letters are

available to ensure unambiguous identifica-

tion.

>The system only accepts name entries

beginning with letters that are stored on the

navigation DVD. The system will not accept

non existent names and addresses.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Destination guidance

144

Destination guidance

Starting destination

guidance

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the

controller until "Navigation" is selected and

press the controller.

2. Select a destination from the destination list

and press the controller or enter a new des-

tination, refer to page 133.

3. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-

troller.

After the route has been calculated, destination

guidance is indicated by arrows or a map dis-

play on the Control Display.

The destination guidance can also be started in

the arrow or map display:

Select the symbol and press the controller.

During destination guidance, you can operate

other equipment using the iDrive at any time.

You will be punctually notified of a change of

direction by spoken instructions and the display

of the direction arrow.

Terminating/continuing

destination guidance

In arrow or map display

Select the symbol and press the controller.

In destination list

This symbol indicates the current destina-

tion.

1. Select the current destination and press the

controller.

2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-

troller.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Navigation Driving tips

145

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility

When you park the vehicle before reaching the

entered destination, the following the question

is displayed before beginning the next trip:

"Continue guidance to destination?".

The destination guidance starts automatically

after a short time.

To start the destination guidance:

Select "Yes" and press the controller.

Route display

You have the option of displaying various views

of the route during destination guidance.

From another menu, you can switch

directly to the screen last displayed,

refer to Comfort opening of menu items on

page 18.<

Displaying arrow display

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Change into the fourth field from the top.

Turn the controller until "Arrow display" is

selected and press the controller.

The arrow display is shown.

1Switching voice instructions on/off

2Selecting route criteria

3Starting/ending destination guidance

4Arrow to destination from a bird's eye view

5Distance to the next change of direction

6Current position

7Direction of travel

>Outline arrow:

Destination guidance on the calculated

route.

>Solid arrow:

Arrow shows the route to be calculated

from a bird's eye view when the vehicle

is not located in an area contained on the

navigation DVD, e.g. in a multi-level

parking lot.

Depending on the equipment, the estimated

time of arrival and the distance to the destina-

tion are displayed in the top or bottom line of the

Control Display.

Before a change in direction, the representation

of the arrow changes.

1Street name for change of direction

2Distance up to change of direction

3Change of direction

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Destination guidance

146

To exit the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Displaying map display

You can have your current position displayed on

a map. After starting the destination guidance,

the planned route is shown on the map.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Change into the fourth field from the top.

Turn the controller until the desired map

view is selected:

>"Map facing north"

>"Map direction of travel"

>"Perspective"

3. Press the controller.

1Switching voice instructions on/off

2Starting/ending destination guidance

3Map-guided destination selection

4Showing/hiding information last selected,

refer to Selecting destination using infor-

mation on page 138

5Changing map display

> "Map facing north"

> "Map direction of travel"

> "Perspective"

6Changing route criteria

7Arrow to destination from a bird's eye view

The estimated time of arrival and the distance

to the destination are shown in the bottom line

of the Control Display.

To exit the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

At scales of less than 250 miles/500 km, you

have the option of deciding whether to orient

the map to north, toward your current direction

of travel, or show the map in perspective. At

scales of 250 miles/500 km or greater, the map

always points toward north.

Changing map display

Select the corresponding symbol and press the

controller.

The next map display is displayed.

Changing scale

Turn the controller to adjust the scale.

Displaying towns/cities and streets of

route

You can have the roads and towns along the

route displayed during destination guidance.

The distances remaining to be traveled on each

individual road are also displayed.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Navigation Driving tips

147

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Change into the third field from the top.

Turn the controller until "Route list" is

selected and press the controller.

To exit the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Destination guidance

through voice instructions

Switching voice instructions on/off

Voice instructions can be switched on or off

during the destination guidance in the arrow or

map view:

Select the symbol and press the controller.

To switch the voice instructions on and off at

any time:

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Display settings"

is selected and press the controller.

4. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the

controller until "Languages" is selected and

press the controller.

5. Select "Navigation voice instructions on"

and press the controller.

The voice instructions are switched on.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use

*

.

Repeating and canceling voice

instructions

With the programmable buttons on the steering

wheel you can also make the following settings,

refer to page 53:

>Repeat the voice instruction:

Press button.

>Switch voice instructions on/off:

Hold the button down.

Setting volume of voice instructions

The volume can only be adjusted while a voice

instruction is being output.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Destination guidance

148

1. Repeat the last voice instruction, if neces-

sary.

2. Turn the button during the voice instruction

to select the desired volume.

This volume is independent of the volume of the

audio sources.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Bypassing route sections

During destination guidance, you can revise the

navigation system's route recommendations to

avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the

number of miles/kilometers that you want to

travel before returning to the original route.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Change into the third field from the top.

Turn the controller until "New route" is

selected and press the controller.

3. Turn the controller to enter the desired

number and press the controller.

The route is recalculated.

To exit from the menu without changing the

route:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Displaying current position

You can have your current position displayed

even when the destination guidance is

switched off.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Change into the fourth field from the top.

Turn the controller until "Current position"

is selected and press the controller.

The current position of your BMW is displayed.

If the navigation system is unable to identify a

town or city, your current map coordinates will

appear.

To exit the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

You can also have the current position dis-

played on a map, refer to page 146.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Navigation Driving tips

149

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility

What to do if …

What to do if …

>a navigation DVD is inserted, but an instruc-

tion to insert the DVD appears on the Con-

trol Display?

The navigation DVD may not be the correct

DVD for the navigation system. This infor-

mation is indicated on the DVD label.

>you request the current position of your

vehicle, but do not receive a precise dis-

play?

The system is unable to receive enough

GPS signals at your current position due to

obstructions, your position is not yet avail-

able on your navigation DVD, or the system

is in the process of calculating your posi-

tion. Reception is best when you have an

unobstructed view to the sky.

>the destination guidance does not accept a

destination?

The data of the destination is not stored on

the navigation DVD that is loaded. Select a

destination that is as close as possible to

the original.

>the destination guidance does not accept

an address without the street name?

On the navigation DVD, no downtown area

can be determined for the city or town

entered. Enter any street, or a destination

such as the railway station in the selected

town, and then start the destination guid-

ance.

>you want to enter a destination for the des-

tination guidance, but it is not possible to

select the letters for your desired entry?

The data of the destination is not stored on

the navigation DVD that is loaded. In this

case, the system will not offer you any let-

ters to choose from. Select a destination

that is as close as possible to the original.

>the system stops furnishing directions on

which way to turn as you approach intersec-

tions?

You are driving in an area that has not yet

been completely recorded on the naviga-

tion DVD. Instead of an arrow indicating a

turn, you will see an arrow which indicates

the general direction of your planned route.

Or you have left the recommended route

and the system requires a few seconds to

calculate a new recommended route.

>the navigation system does not react to

entries?

If the battery was disconnected, it takes

about 10 minutes before the system is once

again operational.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Entertainment

Operation of the radio and CD

as well as their tone settings

are described in this chapter.

Entertainment

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

On/off and tone

152

On/off and tone

The following audio sources have shared con-

trols and setting options:

>Professional radio

*

or

Business radio

>CD player

>CD changer

*

Controls

The audio sources can be operated using:

>Buttons in the area of the CD player

>iDrive

>Buttons on steering wheel, refer to page 11

Buttons in area of CD player

The layout of the buttons can vary depending

on your vehicle's equipment.

Single drive:

Two drives:

1Entertainment sound output on/off, volume

>Press: switch on/off.

When you switch on, the last set radio

station or CD track is played.

>Turn: adjust volume.

2Drive for audio CDs

3 Eject CD

4 Station scan/track search

>Change radio station.

>Select track for CD player and

CD changer.

5Drive for navigation DVDs

Operation via iDrive

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to open

"Entertainment".

You have the following choices:

>"FM" and "AM": radio reception

>"WB": Weather Band station

>"SAT": satellite radio

>"CD": CD player or CD changer

>"Audio Aux": external audio device

>"Set": depending on the audio source,

other adjustments can be made, e.g. with

the radio: update station with strongest

reception, save station, tone control, sam-

ple stations.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

NavigationEntertainment Driving tips

153

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility

From another menu, you can switch

directly to the screen last displayed,

refer to Comfort opening of menu items on

page 18.<

The selected audio source is stored for the

remote control currently in use.

Switching on/off

In order to switch the Entertainment sound out-

put on and off:

Press knob 1 next to the CD player.

This symbol on the Control Display indi-

cates that sound output is switched off.

For a single drive, the sound output is available

for approx. 20 minutes with the ignition

switched off.

Switch on the sound output again for this pur-

pose.

Adjusting volume

Turn knob 1 next to the CD player until the

desired volume is set.

You can also adjust the volume with buttons on

the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Tone control

You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble

and bass, or the speed-dependent volume

increase.

The tone settings are set for all audio sources at

once.

The settings are stored for the remote key cur-

rently in use.

Changing tone settings

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Entertainment settings" and press

the controller.

4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.

The tone settings can also be selected when

you have opened "Entertainment" in the start

menu:

Select "Set" and then "Tone", and press the

controller.

Treble and bass

1. Select "Treble / Bass" and press the con-

troller.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

On/off and tone

154

2. Move the controller to the left or right to

select "Treble" or "Bass".

3. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is selected.

Balance and fader

You can adjust the volume distribution in the

same manner as "Treble / Bass".

>"Balance": left/right volume distribution

>"Fader": front/rear volume distribution

Speed-dependent volume control

The speed-dependent volume control auto-

matically increases the volume with increasing

speed. You can set various stages for the

increase in volume.

1. Select "Speed volume" and press the con-

troller.

2. Turn controller:

The adjustment is applied; the field can be

changed.

Professional LOGIC7 HiFi System*

You can select a spatial sound effect that

improves the spatial acoustics in all frequency

ranges.

1. Select "Surround Settings" and press the

controller.

2. Select "Concert hall" or "Theater".

3. Press the controller.

LOGIC7 spatial sound is switched on.

To cancel the stereo effect:

Select "Off" and press the controller.

LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered

trade marks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the

Harman International Group.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

NavigationEntertainment Driving tips

155

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility

Equalizer*

You can set individual sound frequency ranges.

1. Select "Equalizer" and press the controller.

2. Move the controller to the left or right to

select the desired frequency range.

3. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is selected.

Resetting tone settings

You can reset all tone settings to the default

settings.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Entertainment settings" and press

the controller.

4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.

5. Select "Reset" and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Radio

156

Radio

Your radio provides reception the FM and AM

wavebands.

Listening to radio

Press the button if the sound output is switched

off.

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to open

"Entertainment".

3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the

controller until "FM" or "AM" is selected.

4. Press the controller.

Stations are shown on the Control Display on

the basis of various selection criteria, e.g. "Pre-

sets".

If "Autostore" does not display any stations or if

the stations displayed can no longer be

received, to update the station with the stron-

gest signal, refer to page 157.

Changing stations

Turn the controller.

In addition to the stations currently displayed,

you can have stations with another selection

criterion displayed.

Professional radio*

You can choose from the following selection

criteria:

>"All stations":

Stations that can currently be received in

the "FM" waveband.

>"Autostore":

The stations with the strongest received

signals in the "AM" waveband.

>"Presets":

Stations you have previously stored, refer to

page 158.

Business radio

You can choose from the following selection

criteria:

>"Autostore":

For the Station with the strongest signal,

refer to page 157.

>"Presets":

Stations you have previously stored, refer to

page 158.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

NavigationEntertainment Driving tips

157

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility

Changing selection criteria

1. Change into the second field from the top.

2. Turn the controller until the desired selec-

tion criterion is selected and press the con-

troller.

Buttons next to CD player

Press the button for the corresponding

direction.

The system switches to the next displayed sta-

tion.

You can also change stations with buttons on

the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

Sampling stations, scan

The system automatically plays a brief sample

from each of the stations on the current wave-

band.

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-

ler.

"Set" is selected.

2. Press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

3. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

The stations are sampled.

To end sampling:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

This cancels sampling of the stations, and the

radio remains on the current station.

Buttons next to CD player

To sample the stations, press and hold

the button for the corresponding direction.

To stop scanning, press the button again.

Selecting frequency manually

With "Manual" you can select stations that are

received in addition to those displayed.

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-

ler.

2. Change into the second field from the top.

3. Select "Manual" and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller to set a certain fre-

quency.

Updating stations with best reception

For Professional radio with "AM" and with Busi-

ness radio:

If you are on a longer journey and leave the

transmission range of the stations originally set,

you can update the list of stations with the best

reception.

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-

ler.

2. Change into the second field from the top.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Radio

158

3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.

"Set" is selected.

4. Press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

5. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.

The display of the stations with the strongest

reception is updated. The frequencies of the

stations are displayed.

Storing stations

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-

ler.

2. Change into the second field from the top.

Turn the controller until the desired selec-

tion criterion is selected and press the con-

troller.

3. Select the desired frequency or station.

"Set" is selected.

4. Press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

5. Select "Store" and press the controller.

"Presets" is displayed.

6. Turn the controller until the desired mem-

ory position is selected.

7. Press the controller.

The station is stored.

The channels of the last selection criterion are

displayed once again after a short time.

The stations are stored for the remote key cur-

rently in use.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

NavigationEntertainment Driving tips

159

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility

Changing a memory position

1. Select "Presets" and press the controller.

2. Select the desired station.

"Set" is selected.

3. Press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

4. Select "Store" and press the controller.

5. Turn the controller until the desired mem-

ory position is selected.

The number of the memory position

appears beside the name or frequency of

the station.

6. Press the controller.

The station is stored.

RDS Radio Data System

RDS transmits additional information in the

FM frequency range. If the reception conditions

are good, the station names are shown on the

Control Display. If the reception is weak or dis-

rupted, it can take some time before the station

names are displayed.

Switching RDS on/off*

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-

ler.

"Set" is selected.

2. Press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

3. Select "RDS" and press the controller.

RDS is activated.

Automatically sorting

stations*

For the "All stations" selection criterion, you

can set whether the most frequently used sta-

tions are displayed at the beginning.

1. Select "All stations" and press the control-

ler.

"Set" is selected.

2. Select "Favorites" and press the controller.

The most frequently used stations are

shown at the beginning.

Weather news flashes*

Weather Radio is a service of the National Oce-

anic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA)

of the US Department of Trade. Weather news

flashes are repeated every 4 to 6 minutes and

are routinely updated at intervals of 1 to

3 hours, and more often when necessary. Most

stations operate 24 hours a day. In case of a

storm, the National Weather Service interrupts

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Radio

160

the routine weather news and transmits special

warning messages instead. If you have a ques-

tion about NOAA Weather Radio, please con-

tact the nearest office of the National Weather

Service. Details are also provided on the Inter-

net at www.nws.noaa.gov.

Calling up weather news flashes

1. Select "WB" and press the controller.

2. Select a station.

The station for weather news flashes may be

unavailable in some regions.

High Definition Radio*

Many stations transmit both analog and digital

signals. You can receive these stations digitally

and in improved sound quality.

Activating/deactivating digital radio

reception

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Entertainment settings" and press

the controller.

4. Select "HD radio" and press the controller.

5. Select "Off" and press the controller.

The reception of digital stations is deac-

tivated.

This symbol is displayed when a sender is

being received digitally.

With some stations the digital signals are not

transmitted simultaneously with the analog sig-

nals. If you are in an area in which the selected

station is not continuously received digitally,

playback switches between analog and digital

reception. This can result in repetitions or inter-

ruptions. In this case it may be advisable to

deactivate digital radio reception.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

NavigationEntertainment Driving tips

161

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility

Updating stations offering digital

reception

If you are on a longer journey and leave the

transmission range of the stations originally set,

you can update the list of stations with the best

reception.

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-

ler.

2. Change into the second field from the top.

3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.

4. Press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

5. Select "Autostore " and press the con-

troller.

The display of the stations offering digital

reception is updated. This can take up to 2 min-

utes.

Displaying additional information

With the digital stations, additional information

on the current track is displayed, e.g. the name

of the artist.

1. Select a station and press the controller.

2. Select "Details" and press the controller.

The information is displayed.

If a digital station is received again when the

station is changed, the additional information

will be displayed again following a brief interrup-

tion.

Satellite radio*

You can receive over 100 different channels

with high sound quality.

The channels are offered to you in predefined

packages. To receive the channels of your

choice, you must have this package enabled.

With this new technology the signal may

fail, causing interruptions in reception.<

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Radio

162

Enabling or disabling channels

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to open

"Entertainment".

3. Select "SAT".

4. Press the controller.

The channels are displayed.

These channels are enabled.

Enabling

1. Select a channel that has not yet been

enabled and press the controller.

A telephone number and the electronic

serial number, ESN, are displayed.

The electronic serial number is

required for enabling or disabling.<

2. To enable the channels:

Dial the phone number.

Disabling

1. Select an enabled channel and press the

controller.

2. Select "ESN" and press the controller.

The electronic serial number, ESN, is dis-

played.

The electronic serial number is

required for disabling.<

3. To disable the channels:

Dial the phone number.

Selecting and storing channel

1. Select "SAT" and press the controller.

Channels are shown on the Control Display

sorted on the basis of selection criteria.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

NavigationEntertainment Driving tips

163

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility

2. Select a menu item:

>"Presets":

Up to twelve channels you have stored

previously.

>"All channels":

All channels are displayed.

>"Categories":

All channels, sorted by categories, e.g.

news, jazz.

3. Press the controller.

4. If "Categories" has been selected:

Select the desired category and press the

controller.

The channels of this category are displayed.

5. Select a channel marked with this sym-

bol.

6. Press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

7. Select "Play" and press the controller.

Additional information

The name of the channel and additional infor-

mation on the current track are displayed, e.g.

the name of the artist.

1Artist

2Track

Storing channel

1. Select desired channel.

2. Press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

3. Select "Store" and press the controller.

"Presets" is displayed.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Radio

164

4. Turn the controller to select a memory loca-

tion and press the controller.

The channel is stored. The channels of the last

selection criterion are displayed once again

after a short time.

Changing channel with buttons next to

CD player

Press the button for the corresponding

direction.

The system switches to the next enabled chan-

nel.

Notes

If no signal can be received for more than 4 sec-

onds, a message is displayed on the Control

Display.

Reception may not be possible for certain

reasons, e.g. environmental influences or

topographical conditions. The satellite radio

has no influence on this.

The signal may not be available in tunnels or

underground garages, next to tall buildings,

near trees, mountains or other sources of radio

interference.

Reception is usually possible again as soon as

the signal is available again.<

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

NavigationEntertainment Driving tips

165

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility

CD player and CD changer

Listening to CDs

Compressed audio files*

CDs with compressed audio files, i.e. MP3, can

be played by the CD player, but not by the CD

changer.

CD player: starting CD

When equipped with two drives:

The upper drive is for audio CDs.

Insert the CD into the drive with the labeled side

up. The CD is automatically pulled in.

Playback starts automatically if the sound out-

put is on. For CDs with compressed audio files,

it can take up to approx. 1 minute to read in the

data depending on the directory structure.

To start playback when there is already a CD in

the drive:

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to open

"Entertainment".

3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the

controller until "CD" is selected and press

the controller.

4. On vehicles with a CD changer, change to

the second field from the top and turn the

controller until "CD" is selected and press

the controller.

The CD player is started.

Playback starts automatically if the sound out-

put is switched on.

To eject the CD, press the button on the

CD player.

The CD emerges slightly from the drive.

CD changer: starting CD

1. Fill the CD magazine and insert, refer to

page 169.

2. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

3. Move the controller backwards to open

"Entertainment".

4. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the

controller until "CD" is selected and press

the controller.

*

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

CD player and CD changer

166

5. Change to the second field from the top if

necessary. Turn the controller until the

desired CD, CD 1 - 6, is selected and press

the controller.

At the end of the last track, the next CD will be

selected.

If new CDs have been placed in the CD maga-

zine, playback starts with the lowest CD, e.g.

CD 1, track 1.

The CD magazine's load status is indicated on

the Control Display.

Selecting a track

Buttons next to CD player

Press the button for the corresponding

direction repeatedly until you reach the desired

track.

The CD will start play at the start of the track.

The track is displayed on the Control Display.

You can also change the track with buttons on

the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

Via iDrive

Select a track by turning the controller.

Compressed audio files*

1. Select the directory if necessary and press

the controller.

2. Select the track and press the controller.

3. Select "Play" and press the controller.

To change the directory:

Select the directory and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

NavigationEntertainment Driving tips

167

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility

To exit from the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Displaying information on track*

With compressed audio files, you can display

any information stored on the current track, e.g.

the name of the artist.

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Details" and press the controller.

The information for the current track are dis-

played.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Sampling tracks, scan

The system automatically plays a brief sample

from each of the tracks on the current CD.

1. Select "Set" and press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

To end sampling:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

This cancels sampling of the tracks, and the

player remains on the current track.

Compressed audio files*

1. Select the current track and press the con-

troller.

2. Select the desired menu item:

>To sample all tracks of the current direc-

tory, select "Scan directory" and press

the controller.

>To sample all tracks of the CD, select

"Scan all" and press the controller.

To end sampling:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Scan directory" or "Scan all" and

press the controller.

This cancels sampling, and the player remains

on the current track.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

CD player and CD changer

168

Repeating a track

1. Select "Set" and press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.

The current track on the CD is repeated.

To stop repeating:

1. Press the controller again.

2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.

Compressed audio files*

1. Select the current track and press the con-

troller.

2. Select the desired menu item:

>To repeat the selected track, select

"Repeat track" and press the controller.

>To repeat all tracks of the current direc-

tory, select "Repeat directory" and press

the controller.

To stop repeating:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Repeat track" or "Repeat directory"

and press the controller.

Random play sequence

In this mode, the tracks on the current CD are

played once in a random sequence.

1. Select "Set" and press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

2. Select "Random" and press the controller.

Stop random function:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Random" and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

NavigationEntertainment Driving tips

169

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility

Compressed audio files*

1. Select the current track and press the con-

troller.

2. Select the desired menu item:

>To play all tracks of the current directory

in random order, select "Random direc-

tory" and press the controller.

>To play all tracks of the CD in random

order, select "Random all" and press the

controller.

Stop random function:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Random directory" or "Random all"

and press the controller.

Fast forward/reverse

Buttons next to CD player:

Press and hold the button for the corre-

sponding direction.

CD magazine

The BMW CD changer for six CDs is installed in

the glove compartment.

Removing CD magazine

To insert CDs into the CD magazine 1 or

remove them from it, you must first remove the

magazine from the CD changer:

Press button 2 to eject the CD magazine 1.

Wait at least 2 seconds before pushing in the

magazine again so that the inserted CDs can be

read in again.

Inserting/removing CDs into/from

CD magazine

When inserting or removing CDs, remember to

hold them by their edges, taking care to avoid

touching the data side with its reflective CD

memory surface.

Inserting CDs:

Insert one CD into each compartment of the

magazine with the labeled side up.

Removing CDs:

Pull out the desired tray and remove the CD.

Inserting CD magazine

Push in the CD magazine as far as possible in

the direction of the arrow.

The CD changer automatically reads in the

loaded CDs and is then ready for operation.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

CD player and CD changer

170

Notes

BMW CD/DVD players and changers are

officially designated Class 1 laser prod-

ucts. Do not operate if the cover is damaged,

otherwise severe eye damage can result.

Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels

applied as these can become detached during

playback due to heat build-up and can cause

irreparable damage to the device.

Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard

diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/

DVDs with an adapter, e.g. Single-CDs, other-

wise the CDs or the adapter can jam and may no

longer be ejected.

Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVD

Plus

,

otherwise the CD/DVD can jam and will no

longer eject.<

General malfunctions

BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been

optimized for performance in vehicles. In some

instances they may be more sensitive to faulty

CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.

If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it

has been inserted correctly.

Humidity

High levels of humidity can lead to condensa-

tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and

temporarily prevent playback.

Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs

If malfunctions only occur with individual CDs/

DVDs, one of the following factors may be the

cause.

Self-recorded CDs/DVDs

Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-

recorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsistent

data-creation or recording processes, or poor

quality or high age of the CD/DVD blank.

Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with a

pen intended for this purpose.

Damaged CDs/DVDs

Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and mois-

ture.

Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.

Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over

1227/506, high levels of humidity or direct

sunlight.

CDs/DVDs with copy protection

CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro-

tection feature by the manufacturer. This can

mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or

can only be played to a limited extent.

Care

If necessary, clean the reflective scanning side

of the CDs/DVDs with a commercially available

cleaning cloth by wiping in straight lines from

the center outward.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

NavigationEntertainment Driving tips

171

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility

External audio device

You can connect an external audio device, e.g.

an MP3 player, and play the sound via the vehi-

cle loudspeakers. The sound can be adjusted

with iDrive.

Connecting

1Power supply for your additional device:

Socket with removable cap

2Connection for audio playback:

Jacks εin/3.5 mm

For audio playback via the vehicle loudspeak-

ers, connect the headphone or Line-Out con-

nection of the device to the connection 2.

Starting audio playback

The audio device must be switched on.

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to open

"Entertainment".

3. Select "Audio Aux" and press the control-

ler.

4. Adjust volume and sound if necessary.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Communications

This chapter summarizes how to operate your

mobile phone using iDrive or voice control and

how to use BMW Assist or TeleService.

Communications

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Telephoning

174

Telephoning

The concept

Your BMW is equipped with a full mobile phone

preparation package. After logging on a suitable

mobile phone on the vehicle once, you can

operate the mobile phone via iDrive, with the

buttons on the steering wheel and by voice.

A mobile phone that has been logged on once is

automatically detected again with the engine

running or the ignition switched on as soon as

it is in the vehicle interior. The logon data of up

to four mobile phones can be stored simulta-

neously. If several mobile phones are detected

simultaneously, the respective last mobile

phone logged on can be operated via the vehi-

cle.

Using a phone in your vehicle

Using snap-in adapter*

The so-called snap-in adapter, a mobile phone

cradle, enables the battery to be charged and

the mobile phone to be connected to the exter-

nal antenna of your vehicle. This ensures

improved network reception and a consistent

voice reproduction quality. Ask your BMW cen-

ter which mobile phones snap-in adapters are

offered for.

BMW discourages the use of mobile

phones or other mobile communications

devices inside the vehicle without a direct con-

nection to an outside antenna. Otherwise, the

vehicle electronics and mobile communication

device can influence one another. In addition,

there is no assurance that the radiation which

results from transmission will be dissipated

from the vehicle interior.<

Avoid operating a mobile phone detected by

the vehicle with the keypad of the mobile

phone, otherwise malfunctions can occur.

For your safety

A car phone makes life more convenient in

many ways, and can even save lives in an emer-

gency. While you should consult your mobile

phone's separate operating instructions for a

detailed description of safety precautions and

information, we request that you direct your

particular attention to the following:

Only make entries when the traffic situa-

tion allows you to do so. Do not hold the

mobile phone in your hand while you are driving;

use the hands-free system instead. If you do

not observe this precaution, your being dis-

tracted can endanger vehicle occupants and

other road users.<

Suitable mobile phones

Ask your BMW center which mobile phones

with a Bluetooth interface are supported by the

mobile phone preparation package or which

mobile phones snap-in adapters are available

for. These mobile phones support the functions

described in this Owner's Manual with a certain

software version. Malfunctions can occur with

other mobile phones.

Care instructions

You can find what you need to know about car-

ing for your mobile phone in the separate Caring

for your vehicle brochure and in the mobile

phone operating instructions.

Operating options

You can operate the mobile phone

*

using:

>The steering wheel, refer to page 11

>iDrive, refer to page 16

>Voice commands, refer to page 183

*

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

175

EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility

Making calls with car phone:

BMW Assist calls

You can use the car phone via the hands-free

system for BMW Assist calls.

When the status information "Communication"

or "BMW Assist" is displayed in "BMW Ser-

vice", only BMW Assist calls are possible.

It may not be possible to establish a telephone

connection using the mobile phone while a con-

nection is being established to BMW Assist or

while a call to BMW Assist is already in

progress. If this happens, you must log off the

mobile phone from the vehicle if you wish to

place a call with the mobile phone.

Commissioning

Logging on mobile phone on vehicle

The following prerequisites must be met:

>The mobile phone is ready to operate.

>The Bluetooth link on the vehicle, refer to

page 177, and on the mobile phone is

active.

>Depending on the mobile phone, preset-

tings on the mobile phone are necessary:

e.g. via the menu item Bluetooth activated

or the menu item Connection not with con-

firmation.

>For logging on, specify any desired number

as the Bluetooth passkey, e.g. 1. This Blue-

tooth passkey is no longer required follow-

ing successful logon.

>The ignition is switched on.

Only log on the mobile phone with the

vehicle stopped, otherwise the passen-

gers and other road user can be endangered

due to a lack of attentiveness on the part of the

driver.<

Switching on ignition

1. Insert the remote control as far as possible

into the ignition lock.

2. Switch on the switch on ignition by pressing

the Start/Stop button without depressing

the brake or clutch pedal.

Preparation with iDrive

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Press the button to open the start

menu.

2. Open the menu by pressing the controller.

3. Select "Communication settings" and

press the controller.

4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.

5. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Telephoning

176

Preparation with mobile phone

6. Additional operations must be carried out

on the mobile phone and differ depending

on the model, refer to the operating instruc-

tions of your mobile phone, e.g. find, con-

nect or link under Bluetooth device.

Logging on

Depending on your mobile phone, you will first

be requested consecutively via the display of

your mobile phone or the Control Display to

enter the Bluetooth passkey you specified.

Display on the Control Display if the Bluetooth

passkey can be entered with iDrive:

7. Select "Add device" and press the control-

ler.

8. Enter the Bluetooth passkey.

Depending on the mobile phone, approx.

30 seconds are available for entering the

Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone

and on the Control Display.

9. Select "Confirm passkey" and press the

controller.

10. Wait a few seconds until the list of the

logged-on mobile phones is shown on the

Control Display and "Phone" is selected.

To cancel the logon of the mobile phone on the

vehicle:

Select "Refuse connection" and press the con-

troller.

The next time you use the mobile phone in the

vehicle interior, it will be detected within a max-

imum of 2 minutes with the engine running or

the ignition switched on.

As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the

vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the

SIM card or on your mobile phone are trans-

ferred to your vehicle, refer to the operating

instructions of your mobile phone if necessary.

This transfer is dependent on your mobile

phone, refer to the operating instructions of

your mobile phone if necessary, and can take

several minutes.

Up to four mobile phones can be logged on

consecutively. If you log on a fifth mobile phone,

the logon data of the last mobile phone in the

list will be deleted, refer to below.

List of logged-on mobile phones

All mobile phones for which the vehicle has

stored the logon data can be displayed. If sev-

eral logged-on mobile phones are detected by

the vehicle simultaneously, you can operate the

mobile phone highest up in the list via the vehi-

cle.

You can change the order of the mobile phones

in the list. As long as a mobile phone is selected

in this list, the mobile phones cannot be oper-

ated via the vehicle.

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Press the button to open the start

menu.

2. Open the menu by pressing the controller.

3. Select "Communication settings" and

press the controller.

4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.

5. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

177

EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility

6. Select the desired mobile phone and press

the controller.

7. Select "Move device up" and press the con-

troller.

The selected mobile phone is move upward

by one position.

Logging mobile phone off vehicle

If you no longer want to operate your mobile

phone via the vehicle, you can delete the logon

data of the mobile phone.

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Press the button to open the start

menu.

2. Open the menu by pressing the controller.

3. Select "Communication settings" and

press the controller.

4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.

5. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

6. Select the desired mobile phone and press

the controller.

7. Select "Delete device" and press the con-

troller.

The logged-off mobile phone is deleted

from the list.

The phone book entries you have trans-

ferred from your mobile phone to your vehi-

cle are also deleted in the process.

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link

Bluetooth technology is not approved in

all countries. Observe the applicable local

regulations. Temporarily disconnect the Blue-

tooth link between the vehicle and the mobile

phone if necessary.<

If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you cannot

operate your mobile phone via the vehicle and

other devices with a Bluetooth interface can be

used via the mobile phone, e.g. a laptop com-

puter.

To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link

between your vehicle and your mobile phone:

1. Remove the mobile phone from the snap-in

adapter and switch it off.

2. Press the button to open the start

menu.

3. Select the menu and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Telephoning

178

4. Select "Communication settings" and

press the controller.

5. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.

6. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

The Bluetooth link is activated.

7. Select "Bluetooth communication active"

and press the controller to activate or deac-

tivate the link.

Adjusting volume

Turn the knob during a call to select the desired

volume.

This volume for the hands-free system is main-

tained, even if the other audio sources are set to

minimum volume.

You can also adjust the volume with buttons on

the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Operation via iDrive

You can operate the following functions via

iDrive:

>Dial phone numbers.

>Dial phone numbers from the phone book.

>Dial stored phone numbers, e.g. from the

list of accepted calls.

>Hang up.

With the ignition switched off and radio readi-

ness, e.g. after removing the remote control,

you can continue an ongoing call for a maximum

of 25 minutes via the handsfree system.

Requirements

The logon data of the mobile phone are stored

in the vehicle and the mobile phone is ready to

operate.

The engine is running or the ignition is switched

on.

The mobile phone is detected by the vehicle.

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller forward to open "Com-

munication".

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

179

EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility

Receiving calls

If you have the phone number of the caller

stored in the phone book and the phone num-

ber has been transmitted, the name of the entry

is displayed.

Accepting a call

Select "Accept" and press the controller.

Rejecting a call

Select "Reject" and press the controller.

The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has

been activated.

Calling

Dialing phone numbers

1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

2. Select "Dial" and press the controller.

3. Enter the desired phone number by dialing

the individual digits and pressing the con-

troller.

Always enter the complete phone number

consisting of national dialing code, area

code, and phone number.

The letters correspond to the digits on the

keypad of the mobile phone.

To delete an incorrect character:

Move the controller toward the right to

select , and press the controller.

4. Select "Dial number" and press the control-

ler.

Ending a call

1. Select the phone number and press the

controller.

2. Select "End call" and press the controller.

Dialing a phone number from phone

book or a phone number stored in a list

Phone numbers you have called, incoming calls

and the entries of the phone book are stored in

lists when the mobile phone is connected to the

vehicle via Bluetooth. If the caller is entered in

the phone book, the name of the entry is dis-

played instead of the phone number.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Telephoning

180

You can select the desired subscriber from the

list and establish the connection.

Five lists are available:

>"A - Z"

The entries of the mobile-phone phone

book, consisting of the name and phone

number, are sorted alphabetically.

>"Top 8"

The eight numbers called most frequently

from the phone book "A - Z" are automati-

cally stored in the Top 8 list. The list is

sorted according to frequency.

>"Redial"

The last eight phone numbers you have

dialed are automatically stored. The last

number dialed is at the top of the list.

>"Missed calls"

The phone numbers of the last eight calls

which were not accepted are stored. This

requires the telephone number of the caller

to have been sent.

>"Received calls"

The phone numbers of the last eight

accepted calls are stored. This requires the

telephone number of the caller to have been

sent.

Dialing phone numbers from phone

book

The list "A - Z" is available for you phone book

entries. The phone book entries appear on the

Control Display.

1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.

3. To limit the number of displayed entries,

select the first letter of the desired entry and

press the controller.

4. Select the desired entry and press the con-

troller.

5. Select "Call" and press the controller.

The system dials the number.

If different phone numbers are stored in the

mobile phone under one name, e.g. office and

home, the name is shown once for each phone

number.

You can change a phone number stored in the

phone book, e.g. to call a specific extension:

1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.

3. Select the desired entry and press the con-

troller.

4. Select "Add digits" and press the controller.

5. Change the phone number.

6. Select "Dial number" and press the control-

ler.

Dialing phone numbers stored in a list

To select an entry and establish a connection:

1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

2. Select list and press the controller:

>"Top 8"

>"Redial"

>"Missed calls"

>"Received calls"

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

181

EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility

3. Select the desired entry and press the con-

troller.

4. Select "Call" and press the controller.

The system dials the number.

Deleting individual entries

1. Select the desired entry from the list and

press the controller.

2. Select "Delete" and press the controller.

The entry is deleted.

Deleting entire list

1. Select an entry from the list and press the

controller.

2. Select "Delete all numbers" and press the

controller.

3. Select "Yes" and press the controller.

The list is deleted.

BMW Contact*

If you are not activated for BMW Assist, you can

display several service phone numbers:

>Roadside Assistance

*

of the BMW Group

when you require breakdown assistance

>BMW center, e.g. when you want to make

an appointment for service

>BMW Hotline

*

for information on all

aspects of your vehicle

If BMW Assist is activated, refer to page 188.

You can select the displayed service phone

number if your mobile phone is logged on in the

vehicle:

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller forward to select

"Communication".

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Telephoning

182

3. Select "BMW Contact" and press the con-

troller.

4. Select "BMW Contact Numbers" and press

the controller.

5. Select one of the following menu items and

press the controller:

>"Roadside Assistance"

>"Customer Relations"

>"Service Request"

6. Select "Call" and press the controller.

Contact is established.

Transferring phone number via tone

dialing method

The tone dialing method is required for access

to network services or for controlling devices,

e.g. remote checking of an answering machine.

This function is available when a connection

has been established.

1. Establish connection.

2. Press the controller.

3. Select "Keypad" and press the controller.

4. Select the desired character

and press the

controller.

Each character is sent immediately and

confirmed by a tone depending the mobile

phone model.

Changing between mobile

phone and hands-free system

From mobile phone to handsfree

system

You can continue calls begun outside the Blue-

tooth range of the vehicle via the handsfree sys-

tem when the motor is running or the ignition is

switched on. Depending on your mobile phone,

the system automatically switches over to the

handsfree mode.

For mobile phones that do not automatically

switch over to the handsfree mode:

>Depending on the mobile phone model

used, the conversation can also be contin-

ued via the handsfree system if necessary.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

183

EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility

Act according to what is shown on the

mobile phone display, refer to the operating

instructions of your mobile phone.

>Press the button above the storage

compartment. Switching over may take

several seconds.

From handsfree system to mobile

phone

When you telephone via the handsfree system,

you can also continue the call via the mobile

phone if necessary, depending on the mobile

phone model. Act according to what is shown

on the mobile phone display, refer to the oper-

ating instructions of your mobile phone.

Operation by voice*

The concept

You can operate your mobile phone without

having to remove your hands from the steering

wheel. When making your entries, you will be

supported by announcements and questions in

many cases.

The same prerequisites as for operation via

iDrive apply, refer to page 178.

Symbols in Owner's Manual

Voice commands

Activating system

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

An acoustic signal indicates that you can

say commands.

2. Say the command.

The text or numbers that the voice com-

mand system has registered will appear on

the Control Display.

Ending/canceling operation by voice

Press the button on the steering wheel

or

In dialogs where text is spoken, not a command,

e.g. a name, canceling is only possible using the

button on the steering wheel.

Having possible commands read aloud

The system understands default commands

that must be spoken word for word.

You can have the possible commands spoken

by the system at any point:

Using alternative commands

There are often a number of commands to run a

function, e.g.:

The system recognizes digits from zero to nine.

You can say each digit individually or group

them into a sequence to accelerate the input.

{...}Say the specified commands word for

word.

{{...}} Indicates responses of the system.

{Cancel}.

{Help}

{Dial name} or {Name}.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Telephoning

184

Example: dialing phone numbers

Start the dialog:

Press the button on the steering wheel.

Adjusting volume

You can adjust the volume for the instructions

from the system:

Turn the button during an instruction to select

the desired volume.

This volume for the instructions is maintained,

even if the other audio sources are set to mini-

mum volume.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Calling

Dialing phone numbers

Correcting phone number

After the last spoken sequence of digits has

been repeated by the system, you can delete

this sequence of digits.

The command {Correct number} can be

repeated as often as you like.

Deleting input

{Delete} is used to delete all the digits entered

so far.

Voice phone book

Operating by voice command requires a per-

sonal voice phone book.

>On vehicles with combined drives for audio

CDs and navigation DVDs, the entries are

automatically adopted from your mobile

phone's memory.

>On vehicles with a single drive, the entries

must be entered by voice and are indepen-

dent of your mobile phone's memory. In this

case, it is not possible to use voice com-

mand either to call phone numbers stored in

the mobile phone or to store new numbers.

Command Response

{Dial number}{{Please say the number}}

e.g. {123 456 7890}Depending on equipment:

{{123 456 7890. Continue?}} or

{{123 456 7890. And next?}}

{Dial}{{Dialing number}}

1. {Dial number}.

The dialog for establishing a telephone

connection is opened.

2. Say the phone number.

For telephone calls abroad, say {Plus}

and then the country code.

3. {Dial}.

The connection to the desired sub-

scriber is established.

{Correct number}.

The digits are deleted.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

185

EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility

Creating and editing voice phone

book*

Save entry:

An entry always consists of a name and phone

number.

Delete entry:

You can delete any entry from the voice phone

book.

Delete all entries:

{Delete phone book} deletes all entries in the

phone book.

Have entries read aloud and select:

You can have all the entries of your voice phone

book read aloud in the order of input and select

a certain entry to establish a connection:

Selecting an entry

The connection to the phone number of the

selected entry is established.

Redialing

The {Redial} command calls "Redial".

Notes

The commands in English were available

as of this printing. Other languages are

currently not available. To operate the mobile

phone via the voice command system, refer to

page 22.<

Important for voice commands

For voice commands, keep the following in

mind:

>Issue the commands smoothly and at nor-

mal volume, avoiding excessive emphasis

and pauses.

>Keep the doors, windows and glass sunroof

closed to prevent interference from ambi-

ent noise.

>Avoid making other noise in the vehicle

while speaking.

1. {Save name}.

The dialog for storing a name is

opened.

2. Speak name and repeat entry upon

request.

The spoken length of the names in the

phone book must not exceed approx.

2seconds.

3. Say the phone number when prompted.

4. To store the phone number:

{Save}.

1. {Delete name}.

The dialog for deleting an entry is

opened.

2. Say the name when prompted.

3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.

1. {Delete phone book}.

The dialog for deleting phone book is

opened.

2. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.

3. Confirm the repeated prompt with

{Yes}.

1. {Read phone book}.

The dialog for reading phone book is

opened.

2. {Dial number} when the desired entry is

read aloud.

1. {Dial name}.

The dialog for selecting an entry is

opened.

2. Say the name when prompted.

3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Telephoning

186

Mounting/removing snap-in

adapter

1. Press the area 1 around the button and

remove the cover.

2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front and

press down until it engages.

To remove the snap-in adapter:

Press the area 1 around the button.

Inserting mobile phone

1. Remove the protective cap from the mobile

phone's antenna connector if necessary, so

that the mobile phone can engage in the

snap-in adapter.

2. Push the mobile phone with the keys facing

upward toward the electrical connections

and press down until it engages.

The mobile phone's battery is charged from

radio readiness or with the steering unlocked.

To protect the vehicle's batteries, avoid

using the phone when the ignition is

switched off.<

Removing mobile phone

Press button.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

187

EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility

TeleService , BMW Assist

TeleService

TeleService supports you when communicat-

ing with a BMW center. The built-in car phone

can be used to transmit data regarding the ser-

vice status of your vehicle or regarding legally

mandated inspections directly to your BMW

center. This is the same data that is also stored

for CBS Condition Based Service in the remove

control. Your BMW center can then contact

you, and you can make an appointment that

suits you while you are still on the road. Your

advantage here is that your BMW center can

prepare in advance for the required mainte-

nance work. The TeleService functions are

country-specific: the data regarding the service

status of your vehicle or regarding legally man-

dated inspections is transmitted on a country-

specific basis either automatically before they

fall due or during your calls to the BMW center.

Your BMW center will be glad to provide more

detailed information.

BMW Assist

BMW Assist provides you with other services in

addition to TeleService. For example, the posi-

tion data of your vehicle can be transferred to

the BMW Assist response center if an emer-

gency call

*

has been initiated.

Many functions of BMW Assist depend on the

individually agreed contract. Data transmission,

e.g. of the CBS Condition Based Service, dif-

fers from country to country.

The contract of participation with BMW Assist

and the activation must be completed before

you can use BMW Assist.

When the contract expires, the car phone can

be deactivated by a BMW center without having

to visit a BMW center. Following deactivation of

the car phone, no emergency calls can be

made. The car phone can be reactivated after

signing a new contract with a BMW center.

You can also use the services of BMW Assist via

the Internet. The range of services is continually

being expanded.

Requirements

You can use TeleService or BMW Assist when

the following requirements are met:

>The installed car phone is logged on to a

cellular telephone network. This network

must be capable of transmitting the ser-

vices.

>To transmit position data, the vehicle must

be able to determine the current position.

This can be displayed on the Control Dis-

play.

>For TeleService or BMW Assist to be acti-

vated and updated, the GPS signal must be

available.

>For BMW Assist: you have applied to your

BMW center or BMW Customer Support for

BMW Assist.

Enabling TeleService or BMW Assist

For you to be able to use the services of

TeleService or BMW Assist, these must be

enabled.

Requirements

>Make sure that the vehicle can determine its

current position. Reception is best when

you have an unobstructed view to the sky.

>Leave radio readiness switched on while

connecting to the system.

Enabling

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

**

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

TeleService, BMW Assist

188

3. Select "Communication settings" and

press the controller.

4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press

the controller.

5. Select "Service Status" and press the con-

troller.

6. Select "Enable services" and press the con-

troller.

TeleService and, if applicable, BMW Assist

are enabled; data exchange with the service

center starts.

Enabling takes a few minutes. The status is dis-

played on the Control Display. If you open

another menu, the enable process continue to

run in the background.

Services offered

The following special features apply for the ser-

vices of TeleService and BMW Assist:

>The services offered are country-specific.

>Voice contact is established or data are

transferred, depending on the equipment

and the country. In some countries, it is

possible to do both.

>The data transferred can be the vehicle

data, your current position or the data of the

CBS Condition Based Service.

Automatic service notification*

The data on the service status of your vehicle or

on legally mandated inspections is transmitted

automatically directly to your BMW center prior

to the due date. You can check when the BMW

center was notified.

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Service" and press the controller.

4. Select "Service requirements" and press

the controller.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

189

EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility

5. Select "Service notification" and press the

controller.

Breakdown assistance

You can call Roadside Assistance

*

of the

BMW Group should you require help in the

event of a breakdown.

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller forward to select

"Communication".

3. Select "BMW Assist" and press the control-

ler.

4. Select "BMW Service" and press the con-

troller.

5. Select "Roadside Assistance" and press

the controller.

If the current position can be determined,

the current vehicle location is displayed.

6. Select "Start service" and press the con-

troller.

Contact to Roadside Assistance will be estab-

lished.

Setting up contact to your BMW center

or BMW Customer Relations

You can contact your BMW center, e.g. to

arrange a service appointment.

For information related to your vehicle, call the

BMW Customer Relations.

This requires your mobile phone to be logged

on in the vehicle.

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Service" and press the controller.

4. Select "BMW Service" and press the con-

troller.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

TeleService, BMW Assist

190

5. Select desired BMW service:

>"Service Request"

>"Customer Relations"

6. Press the controller.

7. Select "Start service" and press the con-

troller.

Contact to the desired BMW service will be

established.

Adapting TeleService or

BMW Assist

Displaying and updating services

If the offering from TeleService or BMW Assist

changes, you will be notified. In this case you

should update the services.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Communication settings" and

press the controller.

4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press

the controller.

5. Select "Service Status" and press the con-

troller.

The current services available from

TeleService or BMW Assist are displayed.

6. Select "Options" and press the controller.

7. Select "Update services" and press the

controller.

Blocking services*

If you block the services, the connection to

BMW Assist is deactivated.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Communication settings" and

press the controller.

4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press

the controller.

5. Select "Service Status" and press the con-

troller.

6. Select "Options" and press the controller.

7. Select "Terminate services" and press the

controller.

The use of TeleService or BMW Assist is

blocked, and the current vehicle position will

not be transferred during an emergency call

*

.

To deactivate the blocking function, enabling

must be carried out again, refer to page 187.

This does not affect the contractual agree-

ments.

Enable TeleService and, if applicable,

BMW Assist once again to log on again.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

191

EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility

Displaying vehicle data

When TeleService or BMW Assist is activated,

the license plate and the vehicle identification

number of your vehicle can be displayed.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Communication settings" and

press the controller.

4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press

the controller.

5. Select "Profile" and press the controller.

To adjust the license plate number, please con-

tact your BMW center.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

This section helps you maintain your

mobility by supplying important information

on vital topics including fuels and lubricants,

wheels and tires, service, maintenance and

breakdown assistance.

Mobility

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Refueling

194

Refueling

Always switch off the engine before refu-

eling, otherwise no fuel can be filled into

the tank and a message is displayed.<

When handling fuel, always observe all

applicable precautionary measures and

regulations. Never transport reserve fuel con-

tainers in the vehicle. These could become

leaky and cause an explosion or a fire in an acci-

dent.<

Fuel filler door

To open and close: press the rear edge of the

fuel filler door.

Manual release

If an electrical malfunction should occur, you

can unlock the fuel filler door manually.

Sedan

1. In the luggage compartment, raise the floor

mat and the cover located beneath it.

2. Open the snap fasteners of the right side

panel and take off the side panel.

3. Pull the knob with the gas pump symbol.

Sports Wagon

1. Unhook the retaining strap

*

, refer to

page 119.

2. Open the right-hand side panel in the cargo

area.

3. Pull the knob with the gas pump symbol.

Observe the following when refueling

When handling fuels always observe any

safety guidelines posted at the service

station.<

Place the fuel filler cap in the bracket attached

to the fuel filler door.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

195

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com-

pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid raising the filler

nozzle during refueling, as otherwise this leads

to

>premature pump shutoff

>a reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor

recovery system.

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks

off the first time.

Fuel tank capacity

Approx. 18.5 gallons/70 liters, including the

reserve capacity of approx. 2.1 gallons/8 liters.

Refuel as soon as possible once your

cruising range falls below 30 miles/

50 km, otherwise engine functions are not

ensured and damage can occur.<

Fuel filler cap

Closing

Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly

hear a click.

Do not jam the strap attached to the fuel

filler cap between the fuel filler cap and

the vehicle. A message

*

is displayed if the cap

is loose or missing.<

Fuel specifications

Do not use leaded gasoline, otherwise

permanent damage to the catalytic con-

verter will result.<

Required fuel

Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91

This gasoline is highly recommended.

However, you may also use gasoline with less

AKI. The minimum AKI Rating is 87.

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat-

ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds

when starting at high outside temperatures.

This has no affect on the engine life.

Use high-quality brands

Field experience has indicated significant dif-

ferences in fuel quality: volatility, composition,

additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale

in the United States and Canada. Fuels contain-

ing up to and including 10% ethanol or other

oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by weight,

that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol plus an

equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not void

the applicable warranties with respect to

defects in materials or workmanship.

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in

drivability, starting and stalling problems

especially under certain environmental condi-

tions such as high ambient temperature and

high altitude.

Should you encounter drivability problems

which you suspect could be related to the fuel

you are using, we recommend that you respond

by switching to a recognized high-quality brand

such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier

Detergent Gasoline.

Failure to comply with these recommendations

may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Wheels and tires

196

Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressure

Information for your safety

The condition of the tires and the maintenance

of the specified tire pressure are crucial not only

to the tire's service life, but also to driving com-

fort and most importantly, driving safety.

Checking pressure

Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires

are cold. This means after a maximum of

1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has

been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are

warm, the tire inflation pressure increases.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly

and correct it as needed, even on the

compact tire

*

: at least twice a month and before

starting long trips. Otherwise driving instability

or tire damage, and therefore accidents, can

result from incorrect tire inflation pressures.

Do not drive with depressurized, i.e. flat tires,

except run-flat tires. A flat tire will seriously

impair your vehicle's handling and braking

response. Attempts to drive on a flat tire can

lead to a loss of control over the vehicle.<

After correcting the tire inflation pressure,

reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to

page 90, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor,

refer to page 92.<

Pressure specifications

The tables below provide all the correct inflation

pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient

temperature.

The inflation pressures apply to the tire

sizes and tire brands respectively

approved and recommended by BMW; a list of

these is available from your BMW center.<

For correct identification of the right tire infla-

tion pressure for your tires, observe the follow-

ing:

>Tire sizes of your vehicle

>Load conditions

>Maximum allowable driving speed

Tire inflation pressures for speeds

up to 100 mph/160 km/h

For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h,

adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation

pressures listed on the following pages in the

column Traveling speeds up to max. 100 mph/

160 km/h to achieve optimum driving comfort.

These pressure specifications can be found on

the door post when you open the driver's door.

The permissible top speed for these tire

inflation pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h.

Do not exceed this speed, otherwise tire dam-

age and accidents may result.<

Tire inflation pressures for speeds

above 100 mph/160 km/h

In order to drive at maximum speeds in

excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please

observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures

for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from

the relevant table on the following pages. Oth-

erwise tire damage and accidents could

occur.<

Observe all national and local maximum speed

limits, otherwise violations of the law could

occur.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

197

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

525i/530i

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Compact wheel

*

:

T 135/80 R 17 102 M 61/420

Traveling speeds

up to max. of

100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds

including those exceeding

100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in

the table are indicated in psi/

kilopascal with cold tires.

Cold = ambient temperature

245/45 R 17 95 W

225/55 R 16 95 H M+S

245/45 R 17 99 V M+S XL

29/200 33/230 29/200 33/230 35/240 42/290

225/50 R 17 94 V M+S

225/50 R 17 94 W

245/40 R 18 93 W

225/50 R 17 94 H M+S

29/200 36/250 29/200 35/240 36/250 44/300

Front: 245/40 R 18 93 W

Rear: 275/35R1895W 29/200 33/230 29/200 33/230 36/250 42/290

Front: 245/35 R 19 93 Y XL

Rear: 275/30R1996YXL 30/210 38/260 29/200 33/230 35/240 42/290

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 229.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Wheels and tires

198

525xi/530xi

530xi Sports Wagon

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Compact wheel

*

:

T 135/80 R 17 102 M 61/420

Traveling speeds

up to max. of

100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds

including those exceeding

100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in

the table are indicated in psi/

kilopascal with cold tires.

Cold = ambient temperature

245/45 R 17 95 W

245/45 R 17 99 V M+S XL 29/200 35/240 29/200 33/230 35/240 42/290

225/50 R 17 94 V M+S

225/50 R 17 94 W

225/50 R 17 94 H M+S

30/210 36/250 30/210 36/250 38/260 45/310

245/40 R 18 93 W 30/210 38/260 30/210 36/250 38/260 45/310

Front: 245/40 R 18 93 W

Rear: 275/35 R 18 95 W 30/210 35/240 30/210 33/230 38/260 42/290

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 229.

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Compact wheel

*

:

T 135/80 R 17 102 M 61/420

Traveling speeds

up to max. of

100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds

including those exceeding

100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in

the table are indicated in psi/

kilopascal with cold tires.

Cold = ambient temperature

225/50 R 17 94 W M+S

225/50 R 17 94 W

245/45 R 17 95 W

225/50 R 17 94 H M+S

245/45 R 17 99 V M+S XL

30/210 38/260 32/220 39/270 38/260 45/310

245/40 R 18 93 Y 32/220 39/270 29/200 36/250 35/240 42/290

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 229.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

199

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

550i

Tire identification marks

Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire

makes it easier to identify and choose the right

tires.

Tire size

Speed letter

Q= up to 100 mph/160 km/h

T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h

H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h

V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h

W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h

Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification Number

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of

the U.S. Department of Transportation.

DOT code:

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Compact wheel

*

:

T 135/80 R 17 102 M 61/420

Traveling speeds

up to max. of

100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds

including those exceeding

100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in

the table are indicated in psi/

kilopascal with cold tires.

Cold = ambient temperature

245/40 R 18 93 Y 30/210 38/260 29/200 35/240 33/230 41/280

245/45 R 17 95 W

245/45 R 17 99 V M+S XL 29/200 35/240 32/220 38/260 36/250 44/300

225/50 R 17 94 V M+S

225/50 R 17 94 W

225/50 R 17 94 H M+S

29/200 36/250 33/230 39/270 38/260 45/310

Front: 245/40 R 18 93 Y

Rear: 275/35R1895Y 30/210 35/240 29/200 32/220 33/230 38/260

Front: 245/35 R 19 93 Y XL

Rear: 275/30R1996YXL 35/240 39/270 33/230 38/260 38/260 44/300

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 229.

e.g.

Nominal width in mm

Aspect ratio in Ξ

Belted construction – radial

Rim diameter in inches

Carrying capacity ID-code

(not in ZR tires)

Speed code letter

(in ZR tires before the R)

225/50 R

17

94 W

e.g.

Manufacturer code

for tire make

Tire size and tire design

Tire age

DOT xxxx xxx 0806

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Wheels and tires

200

Tire age

The manufacturing date of tires is contained in

the tire coding: DOT... 0806 indicates that the

tire was manufactured in week 8 of 2006.

BMW recommends that you replace all tires

after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last

for 10 years.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable

on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and

maximum section width. For example:

Tread wear 200 Traction AA

Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades

Tread wear

Traction AA A B C

Temperature A B C

All passenger car tires must conform to

Federal Safety Requirements in addition

to these grades.<

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified gov-

ernment test course. For example, a tire graded

150 would wear one and one-half (1γ) times as

well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions of their use, how-

ever, and may depart significantly from the

norm due to variations in driving habits, service

practices and differences in road characteris-

tics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B, and C.

Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop

on wet pavement as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government test sur-

faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C

may have poor traction performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-

nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac-

teristics.<

Temperature

The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,

and C, representing the tire's resistance to the

generation of heat and its ability to dissipate

heat when tested under controlled conditions

on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the

material of the tire to degenerate and reduce

tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to

a level of performance which all passenger car

tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi-

cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of performance on the

laboratory test wheel than the minimum

required by law.

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,

underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep-

arately or in combination, can cause heat

buildup and possible tire failure.<

RSC – run-flat tires

You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular

symbol containing the letters RSC on the side

of the tire, refer to page 201.

M+S

Winter and all-season tires.

These have better winter properties than sum-

mer tires.

XL

Indicates specially reinforced tires.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

201

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

Tire condition

Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear,

signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged

in the tread. Check the tread depth.

Minimum tread depth

The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/

3 mm, although, for example, European legisla-

tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of

0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 0.12 in/

3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed

hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of

water are present on the road surface.

When winter tires wear down past a tread depth

of 0.16 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less

suitable for winter conditions. For the sake of

safety, new tires should be installed.

Wear indicators at the tread-groove base, refer

to arrow, are distributed over the tire's circum-

ference and are marked on the side of the tire

with TWI – Tread Wear Indicator. If the tire tread

has been driven down to the wear indicators, a

tread depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm has been

reached.

Wheel/tire damage

Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels,

tires and suspension parts to be more suscep-

tible to road hazards and consequential dam-

ages.

Unusual vibrations encountered during normal

vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or

some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam-

ple, be caused by driving over curbs. These

kinds of problems may also be signaled by other

changes in vehicle response, such as a strong

tendency to pull to the left or right.

In these cases, reduce speed immedi-

ately and have wheels and tires thor-

oughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the

nearest BMW center or tire shop that works

according to BMW repair procedures with cor-

respondingly trained personnel. If necessary,

have the vehicle towed there. Tire damage can

be extremely dangerous for vehicle occupants

and other road users.<

Run-flat tires*

You will recognize run-flat tires by the circular

symbol containing the letters RSC on the side

of the tire.

Run-flat tires consist of partially self-contained

tires and special rims. The sidewall reinforce-

ment ensures that the tire retains some residual

safety in the event of pressure drop and driving

remains possible to a restricted degree.

To continue driving with a damaged tire:

>With Flat Tire Monitor, refer to Indication of

a flat tire page 90

>With Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to Mes-

sage with low tire inflation pressure page 92

New wheels and tires

Have new wheels and tires installed only

by your BMW center or tire shop that

works according to BMW repair procedures

with correspondingly trained personnel. If this

work is not carried out properly, there is a dan-

ger of subsequent damage and related safety

hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are bal-

anced.<

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Wheels and tires

202

Retreaded tires

BMW does not recommend that you use

retreaded tires, as driving safety may be

impaired. The causes for this include the possi-

bly different tire casing structures and the often

wide variations in their age, which can result in a

limited service life.<

The right wheels and tires

BMW recommends that you use only

wheel and tire combinations that BMW

has tested and approved for your particular

vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac-

turing tolerances mean that even wheels and

tires with identical official size ratings could

actually have different dimensions than the

approved units – these differences could lead to

body contact, and with it the risk of severe acci-

dents. If non-approved wheels and tires are

used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability,

and therefore cannot be held liable for driving

safety.<

You can inquire about the right wheel/tire com-

bination at your BMW center.

The correct wheel/tire combination also affects

various systems whose function would other-

wise be impaired, e.g. ABS, DSC or xDrive.

To maintain good handling and vehicle

response, use only tires of a single tread config-

uration from a single manufacturer. Following

tire damage, have the original wheel and tire

combination remounted on the vehicle as soon

as possible.

Wheels with electronics for

TPM Tire Pressure Monitor

When mounting new tires or converting from

summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use

wheels with TPM electronics, as otherwise the

Tire Pressure Monitor cannot detect a flat tire,

refer to page 91. Your BMW center will be

happy to advise you on this subject.

Recommended tire brands

Certain tire makes are recommended by BMW

depending on the tire size. You can recognize

these from the clearly visible BMW marking on

the tire sidewall.

When used properly, these tires comply with

the most demanding standards for safety and

vehicle response.

Run-flat tires

When mounting new tires, or changing from

summer to winter tires or vice versa, use run-flat

tires for your own safety. In addition, no spare

tire is available in case of a flat tire. Your BMW

center will be glad to advise you.

For safety reasons, BMW recommends

that you do not have damaged run-flat

tires repaired; they should be replaced.<

Special characteristics of winter tires

BMW recommends winter tires for use in cold

winter driving conditions. Although all-season

M+S tires provide better winter traction than

summer tires, they generally fail to provide the

same levels of cold-weather performance as

winter tires.

Pay attention to speed

Always observe the maximum permissi-

ble speed for the winter tires, otherwise

tire damage may occur, which can result in acci-

dents.<

Storage

Always store wheels and tires in a cool, dry

place with as little exposure to light as possible.

Always protect tires against all contact with oil,

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

203

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum

tire inflation pressure indicated on the side wall

of the tire.

Snow chains*

BMW only tests certain fine-link snow chains,

classifies them as road-safe and recommends

them. Consult your BMW center for more infor-

mation.

Use is only permissible in pairs on the rear

wheels.

Observe the manufacturer's instructions when

mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed

of 30 mph/50 km/h with the chains mounted.

After mounting snow chains, do not ini-

tialize the Flat Tire Monitor, otherwise

incorrect displays can occur.

When driving with snow chains, it may be prac-

tical to briefly activate DTC, refer to page 87.<

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Under the hood

204

Under the hood

Never attempt to perform any service or

repair operations on your vehicle without

the required professional technical training.

If you do not know what repair procedures to

follow, have work on your vehicle done only by

your BMW center or a workshop that works

according to BMW repair procedures with cor-

respondingly trained personnel. If this work is

not carried out properly, there is a danger of

subsequent damage and related safety haz-

ards.<

Hood

Releasing

Pull lever.

Opening

Press the release handle and open the hood.

Closing

Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/

40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard

to engage.

Make sure that the closing path of the

hood is clear, otherwise injuries may

result.

If you see any signs that the hood is not com-

pletely closed while driving your vehicle, you

should stop at once and close it securely.<

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

205

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

Engine compartment

1Filler neck for engine oil, refer to

Adding engine oil

2Brake fluid reservoir, located beneath the

microfilter cover

3Starting-aid terminal, refer to page 220

4Washer fluid reservoir of the headlamp

and windshield cleaning systems, refer to

page 66

5Expansion tank for coolant, refer to

page 207

Engine oil

The engine oil consumption is dependent on

driving style and driving conditions.

Checking engine oil level

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic oil

level check.

The condition for the most accurate indication

of the oil level possible is measurement with the

engine at operating temperature, i.e. following

an uninterrupted drive of at least 6 miles/10 km.

You can display the oil level on the Control Dis-

play while driving or when stopped on a level

surface with the engine running.

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to

page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Service" and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Under the hood

206

4. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the

controller until "Service requirements" is

selected and press the controller.

5. Change to the second field from the top if

necessary. Turn the controller until "Engine

oil level" is selected and press the control-

ler. The oil level is displayed.

Possible messages

>"Engine oil level O.K."

>"No measured value available: Updating

engine oil level measurement...":

Engine oil level is being measured. This

process can take approx. 3 minutes when

stopped on a level surface and approx.

5 minutes while driving.

>"Oil level at the minimum! Refill with 1 quart

of engine oil.":

Add 1 US quart/liter of engine oil at the next

opportunity.

>"Engine oil level too high":

Have the vehicle checked immedi-

ately, otherwise engine damage may

result if too much oil has been added.<

>"Please observe recalculated service inter-

val for engine oil":

Do not add engine oil. Continued driving is

possible. To do this, observe the recalcu-

lated remaining mileage until the next oil

change service, refer to page 209. Have the

system checked as soon as possible.

Adding engine oil

Do not add 1 US quart/1 liter of oil until a corre-

sponding message is shown on the Control Dis-

play.

Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km,

otherwise the engine could be dam-

aged.<

Continuous exposure to used oil has

caused cancer in laboratory testing.

For this reason, any skin areas that come into

contact with oil should be thoroughly washed

with soap and water.

Keep oil, grease etc. out of reach of children and

observe the warnings on the containers to pre-

vent health risks.<

Oil change

Have oil changed only at your BMW center or

at a workshop that works according to BMW

repair procedures with correspondingly trained

personnel.

Approved engine oils

The quality of the engine oil selected has critical

significance for the operation and service life of

an engine. BMW continuously approves spe-

cific oils after confirming their suitability for use

in its vehicles with extensive testing.

Do not use oil additives, as these may

result in engine damage.<

Only use approved BMW High Performance

Synthetic Oil.

If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is

unavailable, you can add small quantities of

other synthetic oils between oil changes. Only

use oils of the specification API SH or higher.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

207

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

Your BMW center will be happy to answer

detailed questions on BMW High Perfor-

mance Synthetic Oil or approved synthetic

oils.<

You can also call BMW of North America at

1-800-831-1117 or visit the website at

www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information.

Viscosity grades

Viscosity is a measure of an oil's flow rating and

is specified in SAE grades.

The choice of the right SAE grade is based on

the climatic conditions in the region in which

you normally drive your BMW.

Approved oils belong to the SAE grades

5W-40 and 5W-30.<

These oils can be used for driving at all outside

temperatures.

Coolant

Do not add coolant to the cooling system

when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant

can cause burns.<

Coolant is comprised of water and coolant addi-

tive. Not all commercially available additives are

suitable for your BMW. Ask your BMW center

for suitable additives.

Only use suitable additives, otherwise

engine damage may result. The additives

present a health hazard; observe the instruc-

tions on the containers.<

Comply with the appropriate environ-

mental protection regulations when dis-

posing of coolant additives.<

Checking coolant level

1. The engine must be at ambient tempera-

ture.

2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank counter-

clockwise to allow any accumulated pres-

sure to escape, then continue turning to

open.

3. The coolant level is correct when the cool-

ant level is between the MIN and MAX

marks, refer to the diagram adjacent to the

filler neck.

4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to

the specified level – do not overfill.

5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.

6. Have the reason for the coolant loss elimi-

nated as soon as possible.

Brake system

Malfunctions

Brake fluid

The warning lamp lights red up in spite

of the handbrake being released; a

message is shown on the Control Dis-

play: stop immediately.

The brake fluid in the reservoir has fallen to

below the minimum level. At the same time, a

considerably longer brake pedal travel may be

noticeable. Have the system thoroughly

checked.

Display of the previously described

malfunction on Canadian models.

When you continue driving, an increased

brake pedal path can be necessary, and

significantly longer braking distances might be

required. Please adapt your driving style

accordingly.<

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Under the hood

208

Brake pads

The warning lamp lights red up in spite

of the handbrake being released; a

message is shown on the Control Dis-

play. The brake pads have reached their mini-

mum pad thickness. Have brake pads replaced

immediately.

Display of the previously described

malfunction on Canadian models.

For your own safety: use only brake pads

that BMW has approved for the corre-

sponding vehicle model. As BMW cannot

assess the suitability of other brake pads for

use on your vehicle, we are unable to assume

continued responsibility for the vehicle's oper-

ating safety if non-approved pads are

installed.<

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

209

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

Maintenance

BMW maintenance system

The BMW maintenance system supports the

preservation of the traffic and operating safety

of your BMW. The service schedule also

includes operations related to the vehicle's

comfort and convenience features, such as

replacement of the filters for the inside air.

The ultimate objective is to ensure economical

maintenance by providing the ideal service for

your vehicle.

Should the day come when you decide to sell

your BMW, a complete dealer service history

will prove to be an asset of inestimable value.

CBS Condition Based Service

Sensors and special algorithms take the differ-

ent driving conditions of your BMW into

account. Condition Based Service uses this to

determine the current and future service

requirements. By letting you define a service

and maintenance regimen that reflects your

own individual requirements, the system builds

the basis for trouble-free driving.

You can set the Control Display to show

remaining distances and times of selected

maintenance intervals and legally mandated

deadlines, refer to page 77:

>Engine oil

>Brake pads, front and rear separately

>Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

>Brake fluid

>Spark plugs

>Vehicle check

>Legally mandated inspections depending

on local regulations

Service data in remote control

Your vehicle stores the information required

maintenance continuously in the remote con-

trol during driving. After accessing the data

stored in the remote control, your BMW Service

Advisor can suggest precisely the right array of

service procedures for your own individual vehi-

cle. You should therefore hand over the remote

control you last used to drive to the BMW Ser-

vice Advisor when you take your vehicle in for

service.

Make sure the date is always set cor-

rectly, refer to page 83, as otherwise the

effectiveness of CBS Condition Based Service

is not ensured.<

Service and Warranty Information

Booklet for US models and Warranty

and Service Guide Booklet for

Canadian models

Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet for US models and Warranty

and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models

for additional information on service require-

ments.

BMW recommends that you have service

and repair operations performed at your

BMW center.

Take the time to ensure that these service pro-

cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi-

cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet

for US models and Warranty and Service Guide

Booklet for Canadian models. These entries

verify that your vehicle has received the speci-

fied regular maintenance.<

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Maintenance

210

Socket for OBD Onboard

Diagnostics interface

Components which are decisive for the

exhaust-gas composition can be checked via

the OBD socket with a device.

This socket is located to the left on the driver's

side, on the underside of the instrument panel

under a cover.

Exhaust-gas values

The warning lamp lights up. The

exhaust-gas values worsen. Have the

vehicle checked as soon as possible.

Display of the previously described

malfunction in Canadian models.

The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This

is a sign of excessive misfiring of the engine. In

this case you should reduce speed and drive to

the nearest BMW center as soon as possible.

Heavy engine misfiring led to serious damage

to the emission-relevant components, espe-

cially the catalytic converter, within a short time.

If the fuel filler cap is not properly tight-

ened, the OBD system can close when

fuel vapor escapes. Then a display light up. If

the cap is then tightened, the display will go out

within a few days.<

Event Data Recorders

Your vehicle may be equipped with one or sev-

eral measuring and diagnosis modules, or with

a device for recording or transmitting certain

vehicle data or information. If you have also

signed a contract of participation for BMW

Assist, certain vehicle data can be transmitted

or recorded to enable corresponding services.

Care

Important information on the care and mainte-

nance of your BMW is contained in the Caring

for your vehicle brochure.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

211

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

Replacing components

Onboard toolkit

Sedan

The onboard toolkit is located in the luggage

compartment lid.

Loosen the wing nut to open.

Sports Wagon

The onboard toolkit is located in the left side

panel of the cargo area.

Wiper blade replacement

Front

1. Fold the wiper arm out and grasp firmly.

2. Press the safety tabs together while sliding

the wiper blade toward the front to disen-

gage it.

3. Mount the new wiper blade and slide in until

it is heard to engage.

Rear*

1. Lift off the wiper arm completely and pull off

the wiper blade, refer to arrow.

2. Mount the new wiper blade and press on

until it is heard to engage.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Replacing components

212

Lamps and bulbs

Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu-

tion to vehicle safety. You must be duly diligent

in replacing them. BMW recommends having

your BMW center perform any work that you do

not feel competent to perform yourself or that is

not described here.

Never touch the glass of new bulbs with

your bare fingers, as even minute

amounts of contamination will burn into the

bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a

clean cloth, napkin, etc., or hold the bulb by its

metal socket.<

A selection of replacement bulbs is available at

your BMW center.

Whenever you perform any work on the

electrical system, turn off the consumers

involved to prevent short circuits from occur-

ring. To avoid possible injury or equipment

damage when replacing bulbs, observe any

instructions provided by the bulb manufac-

turer.<

For care and maintenance of the headlamps,

please follow the instructions in the separate

Caring for your vehicle brochure.

For bulbs for which changing is not

described, and for checking and adjusting

headlamp aim, please contact your BMW cen-

ter.<

Light-emitting diodes LEDs

Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu-

cent lenses serve as the light source for many of

the controls and displays in your vehicle. These

light-emitting diodes, which operate using a

concept similar to that applied in conventional

lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-

emitting diodes.

Do not remove the covers, and never

stare into the unfiltered light for several

hours, as irritation of the retina could result.<

Halogen headlamps

The illustration shows the left-hand side of the

engine compartment.

1Cover cap for low beams

2Cover cap for high beams

Turn the cover cap to the left and remove.

Always wear gloves and eye protection –

the atmosphere within the H7 bulb is

pressurized. Otherwise there is a danger of inju-

ries if the bulb is accidentally damaged during

replacement.<

Low beams

H7 bulb, 55 watts

1. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove.

2. Remove and replace the bulb.

High beams

H7 bulb, 55 watts

1. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

213

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

2. Remove and replace the bulb.

Parking and roadside parking lamps

Bulb 5 watts, W 5 W

One bulb each is located above the low beams

and high beams.

1. Turn the cover cap for low beams or high

beams to the left and remove.

2. Pull out the bulb holder.

3. Remove and replace the bulb.

Xenon lamps*

The service life of these bulbs is very long and

the probability of a failure is very low, provided

that they are not switched on and off an unusual

number of times. If one of these bulbs should

nevertheless fail, it is possible to continue driv-

ing with great caution using the fog lamps, pro-

vided traffic laws in your area do not prohibit

this.

Have work on the Xenon lighting system

performed only by your BMW center or a

workshop that works according to BMW repair

procedures with correspondingly trained per-

sonnel. Due to the high voltage present in the

system, there is a danger of fatal injuries when

work is carried out improperly.<

Parking and roadside parking lamps

In the event of a malfunction, please go to your

BMW center or a workshop that works accord-

ing to BMW repair procedures with correspond-

ingly trained personnel.

Turn signals, front

Bulb 21 watts, PY 21 W

1. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove.

2. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while

turning it to the left for removal and replace-

ment.

Side-mounted turn signals

Bulb 5 watts, W 5 W

1. Press back against the front edge of the

light with the tip of your finger, then pivot it

out.

2. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove.

3. Remove the bulb for replacement.

Side marker lamps, front and rear

To replace, please go to your BMW center or a

workshop that works according to BMW repair

procedures with correspondingly trained per-

sonnel.

Tail lamps

Sedan

>Turn signals: bulb 21 watts, PY 21 W

>Backup lamps: bulb 16 watts, W 16 W

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Replacing components

214

>Other lamps: bulb 21 watts, P 21 W

1Turn signal

2Tail lamp and brake lamp

3Tail lamp and brake lamp

4Backup lamp

5Reflector

6Roadside parking lamp, tail lamp and

brake lamp

Sports Wagon

>Turn signals: bulb 21 watts, PY 21 W

>Backup lamp and brake lamp 3:

bulb 16 watts, W 16 W

>Other lamps: bulb 21 watts, P 21 W

1Turn signal

2Tail lamp and brake lamp

3Brake lamp

4Backup lamp

5Reflector

6Roadside parking lamp, tail lamp and

brake lamp

Center brake lamp

This lamp uses LED technology for operation.

In the event of a malfunction, please go to your

BMW center or a workshop that works accord-

ing to BMW repair procedures with correspond-

ingly trained personnel.

Fender-mounted lamps

Sedan

The illustration shows the left-hand side of the

luggage compartment.

All the bulbs are integrated into a central bulb

fitting.

1. Lift up floor mat.

2. Undo the quick-release fasteners of the

side panel and pull out the panel.

3. Press together the two clips at the top and

bottom on the bulb fitting and remove the

bulb fitting.

4. Backup lamps:

Remove and replace the bulb.

Other lamps:

Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while

turning it to the left for removal and replace-

ment.

Sports Wagon

1. Right side: unhook the retaining strap

*

,

refer to page 119.

2. Open the side panel.

3. Turn the bulb socket to the left and remove.

4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while

turning it to the left for removal and replace-

ment.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

215

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

Lamps in luggage compartment lid

License plate lamp

Bulb 5 watts, C 5 W

1. Insert screwdriver into the slot and press to

the right, refer to arrows. This releases the

lamp.

2. Remove the lamp and replace the bulb.

Sports Wagon:

Backup lamp

In the event of a malfunction, please go to your

BMW center or a workshop that works accord-

ing to BMW repair procedures with correspond-

ingly trained personnel.

Changing wheels

Safety precautions in the event of a flat

tire or wheel change: park the vehicle as

far as possible from passing traffic and on solid

ground. Switch on the hazard warning flashers.

Lock the steering wheel in straight-ahead set-

ting of the wheels. Apply the handbrake and

engage first gear, reverse gear or selector lever

position P.

Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle

and ensure that they remain outside the imme-

diate area in a safe place, such as behind a

guardrail.

If a warning triangle

*

or portable hazard warning

lamp is required, set it up on the roadside at an

appropriate distance from the rear of the vehi-

cle. Comply with all safety guidelines and regu-

lations.

Change the wheel only on a level, firm surface

which is not slippery. The vehicle or the jack

could slip to the side if you attempt to raise the

vehicle on a soft or slippery surface such as

snow, ice, tiles, etc.

Position the jack on a firm support surface.

Do not use a wooden block or similar object as a

support base for the jack, as this would prevent

it from extending to its full support height and

reduce its load-carrying capacity.

To avoid serious or fatal injury: never lie under

the vehicle, and never start the engine while it is

supported by the jack.<

What you will need

To avoid rattling noises later on, note the posi-

tions of the tools before removing them, then

return them to their initial positions after com-

pleting work.

1Chock

*

2Vehicle jack

*

3Lug wrench

*

The tools are located in the mount under the

floor mat or floor panel flap.

1. Lift up floor mat or floor panel flap and cover

located beneath it.

2. Take out the required tools.

3. After using the tools, return then to the stor-

age space.

With run-flat tires, no tools are provided

for wheel changes. They can be pur-

chased as accessories at your BMW center.<

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Replacing components

216

Sports Wagon: removing and installing

floor panel flap of storage area package

1. Unhook the roll-up cover at the rear.

2. Raise the floor panel flap.

3. Unhook the two catch straps at the top.

4. Unlock the gas spring strut, refer to arrow,

and remove.

5. Fold over the floor panel flap toward the

front to release it and remove.

6. Open the front floor panel flap.

7. Swing up the spare tire cover and hook the

hooks into the upper frame of the tailgate

opening.

8. Take out the cross support upward.

When installing the floor panel flap, proceed in

the reverse order and press down the hinge

covers.

Compact wheel*

1. Unscrew the wing nut 1.

2. Remove the washer 2 laterally.

3. Take out the tool mounts 3.

4. Remove the compact wheel.

Preparing wheel change

1. Observe the safety precautions above.

2. Prevent the vehicle from rolling:

Place the chock behind the front wheel on

the other side of the vehicle, or on inclines,

in front of this wheel. On a steep grade, take

other steps to prevent the vehicle from roll-

ing.

3. Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.

Jacking up vehicle

1. Position the vehicle jack at the jacking point

closest to the wheel so that the entire sur-

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

217

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

face of the jack base rests on the ground

perpendicularly beneath the jacking point.

The vehicle jack is designed for

changing wheels only. Do not attempt

to raise another vehicle model with it or to

raise any load of any kind. To do so could

cause accidents and personal injury.<

2. Guide the jack head into the rectangular

recess of the jacking point when cranking

up, refer to illustration detail.

3. Jack the vehicle up until the wheel you are

changing is raised from the ground.

Mounting a wheel

1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the

wheel.

2. Remove accumulations of mud or dirt from

the mounting surfaces of the wheel and

hub. Also clean the lug bolts.

3. Position the new wheel or compact wheel.

Secure the wheel by screwing at least two

lug bolts into opposite bolt holes.

When you mount wheels other than Genu-

ine BMW light-alloy wheels, different lug

bolts may also be required.

4. Screw in the remaining lug bolts. Tighten all

the bolts securely in a diagonal pattern.

5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack from

beneath the vehicle.

After mounting

1. Tighten the lug bolts in a diagonal pattern.

To ensure safety, always have the

lug bolts checked with a calibrated

torque wrench as soon as possible to

ensure that they are tightened to the

specified torque. The tightening torque is

88.5 lb ft/120 Nm.<

2. When stowing the wheel and tools in the

vehicle, execute these steps in the reverse

order.

3. Check and correct the tire inflation pressure

at the earliest opportunity.

Protect valve stems and valve stem

seal caps against dirt and contamina-

tion. Dirt in valve stems is a frequent source

of gradual air loss.<

4. Initialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to

page 90, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor,

refer to page 92.

5. Replace the damaged tire as soon as possi-

ble and have the new wheel/tire balanced.

Driving with compact wheel

Drive reservedly and do not exceed a speed of

50 mph/80 km/h.

The driving characteristics change, for example

reduced track stability on braking, extended

braking distance, and altered self-steering

characteristics in the limit range. In conjunction

with winter tires, these characteristics are more

pronounced.

Only one compact wheel may be

mounted. You should re-equip with

wheels and tires of the original size as quickly as

possible.<

Vehicle battery

Battery care

The battery is 100% maintenance-free, i.e., the

electrolyte will last for the life of the battery

when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli-

mate. Your BMW center will be glad to advise in

all matters concerning the battery.

Charging battery

Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the

terminals in the engine compartment with the

engine off. Connections, refer to Jump starting

on page 220.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Replacing components

218

Disposal

Have old batteries disposed of by your

BMW center or hand them in to a recy-

cling center. Maintain the battery in an upright

position for transport and storage. Always

restrain the battery to prevent it from tipping

over during transport.<

Power failure

After a temporary power loss, the functioning of

some equipment may be limited and require

reinitialization. Individual settings are also lost

and must be updated:

>Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory

The positions must be stored again, refer to

page 47.

>Time and Date

The values must be updated, refer to

page 82.

>Radio

Stations must be stored again if necessary,

refer to page 158.

>Navigation system

Wait until the system starts, refer to

page 149.

Fuses

Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and

do not replace a defective fuse with a sub-

stitute of another color or amperage rating, as

this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately

resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<

Sedan

Spare fuses, plastic tweezers and fuse alloca-

tion diagram are located in the compartment for

the onboard tool kit, refer to page 211.

Sports Wagon

Reserve fuses and a pair of plastic tweezers are

contained in the onboard tool kit, refer to

page 211. A fuse allocation diagram is located

in the cargo area behind the right-hand side

panel.

In glove compartment

1. Release both quick-release fasteners.

2. Fold the cover forward or remove.

Sedan: in luggage compartment

1. Lift up floor mat.

2. Release the quick-release fastener of the

right side panel and pull out the panel.

Sports Wagon: in cargo area

1. Unhook the retaining strap

*

, refer to

page 119.

2. Open the right-hand side panel.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

219

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

Giving and receiving assistance

Emergency call

Conditions for an emergency call:

>Full preparation package mobile phone.

With this equipment, an emergency call is

still possible when no mobile phone is

logged on in the vehicle.

>BMW Assist is enabled.

Enabling BMW Assist, refer to page 187.

>Radio readiness is activated.

>The car phone is logged on to a mobile

communications network.

>The emergency call system is operable.

When the contract of participation with

BMW Assist expires, the car phone can be

deactivated by a BMW center without having to

visit a workshop. Following deactivation of the

car phone, no emergency calls can be made.

The car phone can be reactivated after signing a

new contract with a BMW center.

Initiating an emergency call

1. Briefly press protective cover to open.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the

arrangement of the switches and indicator

lamps may differ somewhat.

2. Press the button for at least 2 seconds.

The LED in the button lights up. As soon as the

voice connection to the BMW Assist response

center has been established, the LED flashes.

If conditions allow, remain in the vehicle until

the connection has been established. You will

then be able to provide a detailed description of

the situation.

If the current position of your vehicle can be

determined, it will be forwarded to the

BMW Assist response center.

If the LED flashes, but you are unable to hear

the BMW Assist response center through the

hands-free system, this could indicate, for

instance, that the hands-free system is no

longer operational. However, you may then still

be audible for the response center.

Under certain conditions, an emergency call is

automatically initiated immediately after a

severe accident. The automatic emergency call

is not affected by the button being pressed.

For technical reasons, the emergency call

cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable

conditions.<

Warning triangle*

The warning triangle is located in the luggage

compartment lid/tailgate.

Sedan

Loosen the wing nut to open.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Giving and receiving assistance

220

Sports Wagon

Release the two quick-release fasteners and

fold down the trim piece.

First-aid kit*

Some of the articles contained in the first-aid kit

have a limited service life. Therefore, check the

expiration dates of the contents regularly and

replace the contents concerned in good time if

necessary.

Sedan

The first-aid kit is located in the luggage com-

partment lid.

Loosen the wing nut to open.

Sports Wagon

The first-aid kit is located in the right side panel

of the cargo area. Before opening the side

panel, pull the retaining strap

*

toward the rear

by its rear end and unhook it.

Roadside Assistance*

The Roadside Assistance of the BMW Group

offers you assistance in the event of a break-

down around the clock, including on weekends

and public holidays.

The phone numbers of the Roadside Assis-

tance in your home country can be found in the

Contact brochure.

With BMW Assist or TeleService, you can con-

tact the Roadside Assistance of the BMW

Group for assistance in the event of a break-

down directly via iDrive, refer to page 189.

Jump starting

When your battery is discharged, you can use

two jumper cables to start your BMW with

power from the battery in a second vehicle. You

can also use the same method to help start

another vehicle. Use only jumper cables with

fully-insulated clamp handles.

To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,

always avoid all contact with electrical

components while the engine is running. Care-

fully adhere to the following sequence, both to

prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to

guard against possible personal injuries.<

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

221

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

Preparation

1. Check whether the battery of the other

vehicle has a voltage of 12 Volts and

approximately the same capacitance in Ah.

This information can be found on the bat-

tery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi-

cle.

3. Switch off any electrical systems and com-

ponents in both vehicles.

There must not be any contact between

the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise

there is a danger of shorting.<

Connecting jumper cables

To avoid personal injury from sparks, fol-

low this sequence when connecting

jumper cables.<

In your BMW, the so-called auxiliary terminal

for jump starting in the engine compartment

serves as a positive terminal for the battery, also

refer to engine compartment overview on

page 205. The cover cap is marked with a +.

1. Fold open the cover of the BMW starting-

aid terminal. To do so, pull the tab.

2. Attach one end of the jumper cable plus/+

to the positive terminal of the battery or a

starting-aid terminal of the vehicle provid-

ing assistance.

3. Attach the second end of the cable to the

positive terminal of the battery or to a start-

ing-aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.

4. Attach one end of the jumper cable minus/–

to the negative terminal of the battery or to

an engine or body ground of the assisting

vehicle.

Your BMW has a special nut as body ground

or negative terminal.

5. Attach the second end of the cable to the

negative terminal of the battery or to the

engine or body ground of the vehicle to be

started.

Starting engine

1. Start the engine on the assisting vehicle

and allow it to run at idle for several minutes

at slightly increased speed.

2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the

usual way.

If the first starting attempt is not successful,

wait a few minutes before another attempt

in order to allow the discharged battery to

recharge.

3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.

4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing

the connection sequence.

Check the battery and recharge if necessary.

Never use spray fluids to start the

engine.<

Tow-starting and towing

Observe applicable laws and regulations

for tow-starting and towing.<

Do not transport any passengers other

than the driver in a vehicle that is being

towed.<

Using tow fitting

The screw-on tow-fitting must always be car-

ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the

front or rear of the BMW.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Giving and receiving assistance

222

Sedan:

It is located in the toolkit in the luggage com-

partment lid, refer to page 211.

Sports Wagon:

It is located in the toolkit behind the left side

panel in the cargo area, refer to page 211.

Use only the tow fitting provided with the

vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the

tow fitting for towing only on roads. Avoid lateral

loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift the vehi-

cle by the tow fitting. Otherwise damage to the

tow fitting and the vehicle can occur.<

Access to screw thread

Rectangular cover panel in bumper: press on

the arrow symbol on the cover panel.

Front

Rear

Being towed

Make sure that the ignition is switched on,

refer to page 58, otherwise the low

beams, tail lamps, turn signals and windshield

wipers would not be available. If the vehicle

electrical system fails, do not tow-start or tow

the vehicle. The electric steering-wheel lock

cannot be unlocked and the vehicle cannot be

steered. For information on jump starting, refer

to page 220. There is no power assistance with

the engine stopped. This then requires

increased effort for braking and steering. Active

steering is deactivated and larger steering

wheel movements are required.<

Switch on the hazard warning flashers depend-

ing on the local regulations. If the electrical sys-

tem fails, mark the vehicle to be towed, e.g. with

a sign or warning triangle in the rear window.

Manual transmission

Gearshift lever in neutral position.

Automatic transmission

Selector lever in position N.

Changing selector lever position, refer to

Deactivating selector lever interlock page 64.

Do not exceed a towing speed of 45 mph/

70 km/h and a towing distance of

90 miles/150 km, otherwise the automatic

transmission may be damaged.<

SMG Sequential Manual Transmission

Engage selector lever position N with the igni-

tion switched on.

Towing methods

Do not lift vehicle by tow fitting or body

and chassis parts, otherwise damage may

result.<

In some countries, towing with tow bars or

ropes in public traffic is not permitted. Familiar-

ize yourself with the regulations on towing in the

respective country.

With tow bar

The towing vehicle may not be lighter

than the vehicle to be towed, otherwise it

will not be possible to reliably control vehicle

response.<

The tow fittings used should be on the same

side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi-

ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset

angle, please observe the following:

>Clearance and maneuvering capability will

be sharply limited during cornering.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

223

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

>When mounted at an angle, the tow bar will

exert lateral forces, tending to push the

vehicle sideways.

Only attach the tow bar to the tow fittings,

as attachment to other vehicle parts can

lead to damage.<

With tow rope

When starting off in the towing vehicle, make

sure that the tow rope is taut.

To avoid jerking and the associated

stresses on vehicle components when

towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.

Only attach tow ropes to the tow fittings, as

attachment to other vehicle parts can lead to

damage.<

With tow truck

Have the BMW transported with a tow truck

with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

With tow truck for 525xi, 530xi

Do not tow the BMW with xDrive with the

front or rear axle raised individually, other-

wise the wheels may block and the transfer

case may be damaged.<

The BMW may only be transported on a flat

bed.

Tow-starting

Do not tow-start the vehicle if possible, but

instead start the engine by means of jump start-

ing, refer to page 220. With a catalytic con-

verter, tow-starting should only be carried out

with the engine cold, and with automatic trans-

missions, the engine cannot be started by tow-

starting.

If the electrical system fails, do not tow-

start or tow the vehicle, as otherwise the

electric steering-wheel lock cannot be

unlocked and the vehicle cannot be steered.<

1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers,

comply with country-specific regulations.

2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 58.

3. Shift into 3rd gear. For information on SMG,

see below.

4. Tow-start with the clutch completely

depressed and slowly release the clutch.

After the engine starts, immediately

depress the clutch again completely.

5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow

bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn-

ing flashers.

6. Have the vehicle checked.

SMG Sequential Manual Transmission

1. Tow-start in selector lever position N.

2. Select the Sequential mode. The correct

gear will be selected and engaged automat-

ically.

Do not activate the HDC Hill Descent

Control of the 525xi, 530 xi during tow-

starting, refer to page 88.<

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

This chapter contains the technical data,

the short commands of the voice command

system, and the index that will direct you

as quickly as possible to the information

you are looking for.

Reference

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Technical data

226

Technical data

Engine data

525i/xi 530i/xi 550i

Displacement cu in/cmµ182.8/2,996 182.8/2,996 292.8/4,799

No. of cylinders 668

Maximum output hp 215 255 360

at engine speed rpm 6,250 6,600 6,300

Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 185/251 220/298 360/488

at engine speed rpm 2,750 2,750 3,400

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

227

At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Dimensions

All dimensions are given in inches/mm.

Vehicle height with xDrive: 58.3 in/1,482 mm

Smallest turning circle diam.: 37.5 ft/11.4 m, with xDrive 39 ft/11.9 m

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Technical data

228

All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 39 ft/11.9 m

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

229

At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Weights

Never exceed either the approved axle loads or

the gross vehicle weight.

Never exceed either the approved axle loads or

the gross vehicle weight.

Sedan 525i 530i 550i

Curb weight

>Manual transmission, SMG lbs./kg 3,395/1,540 3,450/1,565 3,902/1,770

>Automatic transmission lbs./kg 3,439/1,560 3,472/1,575 3,924/1,780

Approved gross vehicle weight

>Manual transmission, SMG lbs./kg 4,497/2,040 4,552/2,065 5,004/2,270

>Automatic transmission lbs./kg 4,541/2,060 4,575/2,075 5,026/2,280

Load lbs./kg 1,102/500 1,102/500 1,102/500

Approved front axle load lbs./kg 2,161/980 2,227/1,010 2,469/1,120

Approved rear axle load lbs./kg 2,601/1,180 2,601/1,180 2,679/1,215

Approved roof load capacity lbs./kg 220/100 220/100 220/100

Luggage compartment capacity cu ft/l 18.4/520 18.4/520 18.4/520

Sedan 525xi 530xi

Curb weight

>Manual transmission lbs./kg 3,593/1,630 3,670/1,660

>Automatic transmission lbs./kg 3,638/1,650 3,704/1,680

Approved gross vehicle weight

>Manual transmission lbs./kg 4,696/2,130 4,762/2,160

>Automatic transmission lbs./kg 4,740/2,150 4,806/2,180

Load lbs./kg 1,102/500 1,102/500

Approved front axle load lbs./kg 2,315/1,050 2,315/1,050

Approved rear axle load lbs./kg 2,646/1,200 2,646/1,200

Approved roof load capacity lbs./kg 220/100 220/100

Luggage compartment capacity cu ft/l 18.4/520 18.4/520

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Technical data

230

Never exceed either the approved axle loads or

the gross vehicle weight.

Capacities

Sports Wagon 530xi

Curb weight

>Manual transmission lbs./kg 3,858/1,750

>Automatic transmission lbs./kg 3,891/1,765

Approved gross vehicle weight

>Manual transmission lbs./kg 5,049/2,290

>Automatic transmission lbs./kg 5,082/2,305

Load lbs./kg 1,190/540

Approved front axle load lbs./kg 2,381/1,080

Approved rear axle load lbs./kg 2,866/1,300

Approved roof load capacity lbs./kg 220/100

Luggage compartment capacity cu ft/l 17.7-58.3/500-1,650

Notes

Fuel tank gal/liters approx. 18.5/70 Fuel grade: page 195

of that reserve gal/liters approx. 2.1/8

Window cleaning system For more details: page 66

>Sedan US quarts/liters approx. 3.2/3

>incl. headlamp washer system US quarts/liters approx. 5.3/5

>Sports Wagon US quarts/liters approx. 5.3/5

Engine with oil filter change BMW High Performance

Synthetic Oil.

Oil grades: page 206

>525i/xi, 530i/xi US quarts/liters 6.9/6.5

>550i US quarts/liters 8.5/8.0

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

231

At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Short commands of voice command

system

With short commands you can carry out certain

functions directly, regardless of which menu

item is selected. Here are the important short

commands for the voice command system.

Assistance window

Communication

*

Function Command

To open the assistance window 20 {Assistance window}

To select the display in the assistance window 20 {Assistance window map facing north},

{Assistance window map direction of travel},

{Assistance window arrow display},

{Assistance window perspective},

{Assistance window current position},

{Assistance window trip computer} or

{Assistance window onboard info}

To change scale in assistance window 146 {Assistance window scale ... feet} or

{Assistance window scale ... miles}

Function Command

To open phone 175 {Phone}

To dial phone number 179 {Dial number}

To display phone book 179 {A to Z}

To select from the phone book 179 {Call ...} or

{Dial name}

To display "Top 8" 180 {Top 8}

To redial 179 {Redial}

To display "Received calls" 180 {Received calls}

To display "Missed calls" 180 {Missed calls}

To display "Bluetooth" 176 {Bluetooth}

To open BMW Assist 189 {BMW Assist}

To open "BMW Service" 189 {BMW Service}

To open "BMW Contact" 181 {BMW Contact}

To open "BMW Contact Numbers" 181 {BMW Contact numbers}

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Short commands of voice command system

232

Navigation

Onboard info

Function Command

To open navigation system 133 {Navigation}

To open "Enter address" 133 {Enter address}

To open "New destination" 133 {New destination}

To display "Input map" 137 {Input map}

To display destination list 139 {Destination list}

To display address book 140 {Address book}

To display route criteria 142 {Route preference}

To start destination guidance 144 {Start guidance}

To end destination guidance 144 {Stop guidance}

To display arrow display 145 {Arrow display}

To display map display 146 {Map},{Map facing north},

{Map direction of travel} or

{Perspective}

To change scale 146 {Scale ... miles} or

{Scale ... feet}

To display roads or towns/cities along route 146 {Route list}

To switch on voice instructions 147 {Navigation info on}

To switch off voice instructions 147 {Navigation info off}

To repeat voice instructions 147 {Repeat navigation info}

To open route 142, 146 {Route}

To open "New route" 148 {New route}

To display current position 148 {Current position}

Function Command

To open "Car Data" 76 {Car data}

To display computer 76 {Onboard info}

To display trip computer 76 {Trip computer}

To open speed limit 81 {Limit}

To open stopwatch 81 {Stopwatch}

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

233

At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Entertainment

Function Command

Tone control 153 {Audio}

To switch on radio 156 {Radio on},

{FM on} or

{AM on}

To open "FM" 156 {FM menu}

To open "AM" 156 {AM menu}

To open "All stations" 156 {FM All stations}

To select radio station 156 {Station ...} or

{Choose station}

To open "Presets" 156 {FM presets} or

{AM presets}

To select stored radio station 156 {Choose preset}

To open "Manual" 157 {FM manual},

{AM manual} or

{Choose frequency},

{Frequency ... Megahertz}

To open strongest radio stations 157 {AM Autostore}

To open "WB" 160 {Weatherband menu}

To switch on weatherband 160 {Weatherband on}

To select a weatherband station 160 {Choose weatherband station}

To open "SAT" 162 {SAT radio menu}

To switch on satellite radio 162 {SAT radio}

To open "Presets" of satellite radio 163 {SAT radio presets}

To open "All channels" of satellite radio 162 {SAT radio all channels}

To open "Categories" of satellite radio 162 {SAT radio categories}

To open CD player 165 {CD menu}

To switch on CD player 165 {CD}

To open CD changer 165 {CD-changer menu}

To switch on CD changer 165 {CD-changer}

To select CD 165 {CD 1...6}

To select music track 166 {CD track ...}

To select CD and music track 166 {CD 1...6 track ...}

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Short commands of voice command system

234

Climate

menu

Function Command

To adjust temperature distribution for front seat

heating 50

{Seat heater distribution}

To open "Vent settings" 107 {Vent settings}

To open "Automatic programs" 106 {Automatic programs}

To open "Parked car ventilation" 109 {Parked car operation}

To open "Automatic ventilation" 109 {Automatic ventilation}

To display activation times 109 {Activation time}

Function Command

To open "Door locks" 30, 32 {Door locks}

To open "Steering wheel buttons" 53 {Steering wheel buttons}

To open "Lighting" 64 {Lighting}

To open "Communication settings" 187 {Communication settings}

To open "BMW Service settings" 187 {BMW Service settings}

To open "BMW Service" 189 {BMW service}

To open "Service requirements" 77, 188 {Service requirements}

To open "Service" 77, 188 {Service}

To display "Check Control messages" 80 {Check Control messages}

To open "Display settings" 82 {Display settings}

To open "Head-Up Display" 97 {Head-up display}

To activate speed limit 81 {Limit on}

To deactivate speed limit 81 {Limit off}

To set brightness of Control Display 83 {Brightness}

To open "Units" 84 {Units}

To open "Languages" 84, 147 {Language}

To open "Time" 82 {Time}

To open "Date" 83 {Date}

To open "PDC" 85 {PDC}

To open "FTM" 90 {FTM}

To open "TPM" 92 {TPM}

To open "HDC" 88 {HDC}

To open "Entertainment settings" 153 {Entertainment settings}

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

235

At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Activating BMW Night Vision 99 {Night Vision on}

Deactivating BMW Night Vision 99 {Close Night Vision}

Displaying settings for BMW Night Vision 99 {Night Vision configuration}

Function Command

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Everything from A to Z

236

Everything from A to Z

Index

"..." Identifies Control Display

texts used to select

individual functions, and

indicates where to find them

in the text.

A

ABS Antilock Brake

System 86

ACC, refer to Active cruise

control 67

Acceleration assistant for

SMG Sequential Manual

Transmission 63

Accessories 6

Acoustic signal, refer to Check

Control 79

Activated-charcoal filter 109

"Activation time" for parked-

car ventilation 109

Active cruise control 67

– indicator lamp 70

– radar sensor 71

– selecting distance 69

– warning lamps 71

Active head restraints,

front 49

Active seat 51

Active seat ventilation 51

Active steering 93

– warning lamp 94

Adapter for spare key 28

Adaptive brake lamps, refer to

Brake force display 94

Adaptive Head Light 102

"Add digits" for mobile

phone 180

"Address book" for navigation

system 140

Address for navigation

– deleting 141

– entering 133,136

– selecting 141

– storing 140

– storing current position 140

"Add to address book" 140

"Add to destination list" 136

Adjusting active backrest

width 47

Adjusting confirmation signals

for locking and unlocking 31

Adjusting the tone during

audio operation, refer to

Tone control 153

Adjusting thigh support 46

Adjustment in audio mode

– front-to-rear 154

– right/left balance 154

"After door opened" 48

"After unlocking" 48

Airbags 94

– sitting safely 45

– warning lamp 96

Air circulation, refer to Air

recirculation 108

Air distribution

– automatic 106

– manual 107

Airing, refer to Ventilation 108

Air recirculation

– AUC Automatic recircu-

lated-air control 108

– recirculated-air mode 108

"Air recirculation on / off" 53

Air vent outlets of automatic

climate control 105

Air vents 105

– refer to Ventilation 108

Air volume 107

AKI, refer to Fuel quality 195

Alarm system 37

– avoiding unintentional

alarms 38

– interior motion sensor 38

– switching off alarm 38

– switching off tilt alarm

sensor and interior motion

sensor 38

– tilt alarm sensor 38

"All channels" 163

"All doors" 30

All-season tires, refer to

Winter tires 202

"All stations", calling up with

radio 156,159

All-wheel drive, refer to

xDrive 87

Alterations, technical, refer to

For your own safety 5

Altering stretch of road 148

"AM", reception

range 152,156

Antenna for mobile phone 174

Antifreeze

– coolant 207

– washer fluid 66

Antilock Brake System

ABS 86

Anti-theft alarm system, refer

to Alarm system 37

Anti-theft system, refer to

Central locking system 29

Approved axle loads, refer to

Weights 229

Approved engine oils 206

Approved gross vehicle

weight, refer to Weights 229

Armrest, refer to Center

armrest, rear 116

Around the center console 14

Around the steering wheel 10

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

237

At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Arrival time

– refer to Computer 76

– refer to Starting destination

guidance 144

"Arrow display" for navigation

system 145

Ashtray

– front 115

– rear 115

Assist, refer to

BMW Assist 187

Assistance systems, refer to

Driving stability control

systems 86

Assistance window 20

"Assist. window off" 21

AUC Automatic recirculated-

air control 108

Audio 152

– controls 152

– switching on/off 152

– tone control 153

– volume 153

"Audio", refer to Tone

control 153

"Audio Aux" 152,171

– on external audio device 171

Audio device, external 114

Automatic

– air distribution 106

– air volume 106

– garage door opener 111

– headlamp control 101

– service notification 188

– steering wheel adjustment,

refer to Easy entry/exit 52

– storing stations 157

– tailgate operation 36

Automatically switching

between high beams and

low beams, refer to High-

beam assistant 103

Automatic car washes 126

– also refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure

Automatic climate control 105

– automatic air

distribution 106

– switching off 108

Automatic closing of doors,

refer to Automatic soft

closing 33

Automatic curb monitor 52

Automatic lighting

– refer to Automatic headlamp

control 101

– refer to Daytime running

lamps 102

– refer to High-beam

assistant 103

– refer to Interior lamps 104

– refer to Pathway lighting 101

Automatic low-beam function,

refer to High-beam

assistant 103

"Automatic programs" 106

Automatic recirculated-air

control AUC 108

Automatic roll-up cover,

Sports Wagon 117

Automatic soft closing 33

Automatic station search 157

Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 63

– deactivating selector lever

interlock 64

– interlock 63

– kick-down 64

– selector lever interlock 63

– shiftlock 63

– sport program 64

– tow-starting 222,223

– with comfort access 40

"Automatic ventilation" 109

AUTO program for automatic

climate control 106

"Autostore" on the

radio 156,158

AUX-In

– connection 114

– refer to External audio

device 171

Average fuel consumption 75

– setting the units 84

Average speed, refer to

Computer 75

"Avoid ferries" for navigation

system 143

"Avoid highways" for

navigation system 143

Avoiding freeways for

navigation 142

Avoiding unintentional

alarms 38

"Avoid tollroads" for

navigation system 143

Axle loads, refer to

Weights 229

"A - Z" 180

B

Backrest contour, refer to

Lumbar support 46

Backrests, refer to Seats 46

Backrest width adjustment 46

Back seats, refer to Rear seats

Backup lamps, refer to

Reverse gear 61

– replacing bulbs 213

"Balance", refer to Tone

control 154

Balance, refer to Tone

control 154

Band-aids, refer to First-aid

kit 220

Bass, refer to Tone

control 153

"Bass", tone control 154

Battery, refer to Vehicle

battery 217

– jump starting 220

Battery disposal

– remote control with comfort

access 40

– vehicle battery 218

Battery replacement, remote

control with comfort

access 40

Being towed 222

Belts, refer to Safety belts 49

Beverage holder, refer to Cup

holders 114

Blower, refer to Air

volume 107

"BMW Assist" 189

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Everything from A to Z

238

BMW Assist 187

– enabling 187

– services offered 188

"BMW Contact" 182

"BMW Contact

Numbers" 182

BMW homepage 4

BMW maintenance

system 209

BMW Night Vision 98

– activating 99

– cleaning camera 100

– cleaning camera, refer to

Wiper system 66

– deactivating 99

– making settings 99

"BMW Service" 189

"BMW Service settings" 188

BMW website 4

Bottle holder, refer to Cup

holders 114

Brake Assistant, refer to DBC

Dynamic Brake Control 86

Brake fluid 207

– warning lamp 207

Brake force display 94

Brake lamps

– brake force display 94

– replacing bulbs 213

Brake pads 208

– breaking-in 124

Brake rotors 126

Brakes

– ABS Antilock Brake

System 86

– brake fluid 207

– brake force display 94

– brake pads 208

– breaking-in 124

– handbrake 60

– warning lamps 13

Brake system 124,207

– brake fluid level 207

– brake pads 124,208

– breaking-in 124

– disk brakes 126

– warning lamp 207

Braking

– CBC Cornering Brake

Control 86

– DBC Dynamic Brake

Control 86

– electronic brake-force

distribution 86

– refer to Braking safely 125

Braking safely 125

Breakdown assistance 189

Breakdown services, refer to

Roadside Assistance 220

Breaking-in the clutch 124

Breaking-in the

differential 124

Break-in period 124

"Brightness" 83

– with BMW Night Vision 100

Brightness of Control

Display 83

Button for starting engine 58

Buttons on steering wheel 11

C

California Proposition 65

Warning 6

"Call" 180

Call

– accepting 179

– displaying accepted 180

– ending 179

– in absence 180

– starting 179

Calling

– from phone book 179

– from Top 8 list 180

– redialing 180

– refer to telephone operating

instructions

Can holder, refer to Cup

holders 114

Capacities 230

Capacity

– of cargo area 229

– of luggage

compartment 229

Car battery, refer to Vehicle

battery 217

Car care, refer to Caring for

your vehicle brochure

Car-care products, refer to

Caring for your vehicle

brochure

"Car Data" 76

Care 210

– refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure

Cargo

– refer to Loading 126

– securing 128

– securing with ski bag 120

Cargo area

– capacity 229

– emergency operation, refer

to Opening manually 36

– increasing 117

– opening/closing, refer to

Tailgate 35

– opening from inside 35

– opening from outside 35

– opening with remote

control 31

Cargo area cover, refer to Roll-

up cover

Caring for artificial leather,

refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure

Caring for leather, refer to

Caring for your vehicle

brochure

Caring for light-alloy wheels,

refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure

Caring for the carpet, refer to

Caring for your vehicle

brochure

Caring for the vehicle finish,

refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure

Car key, refer to Keys/remote

control 28

Car phone 174

– installation location, refer to

Center armrest 113

– refer to Mobile phone 174

– refer to separate operating

instructions

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

239

At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Car radio, refer to Radio 156

Car wash 126

– also refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure

– with comfort access 40

Catalytic converter, refer to

Hot exhaust system 124

"Categories" 163

CBC Cornering Brake

Control 86

CBS Condition Based

Service 209

"CD" 152,165

CD changer 165

– controls 152

– fast forward/reverse 169

– installation location 169

– playing a track 167

– random order 168

– repeating a track 168

– selecting a CD 165

– selecting a track 166

– switching on/off 152

– tone control 153

– volume 153

CD player 165

– controls 152

– fast forward/reverse 169

– playing a track 167

– random order 168

– repeating a track 168

– selecting a track 166

– switching on/off 152

– tone control 153

– volume 153

Center armrest

– front 113

– rear 116

Center brake lamp 214

Center console 14

"Central locking" 30

Central locking system 29

– comfort access 38

– from inside vehicle 32

Changes, technical

– refer to For your own

safety 5

– refer to Parts and

accessories 6

Changing language on

Control Display 84

Changing units of measure on

Control Display 84

Changing wheels 201,215

CHECK button 80

Check Control 79

"Check Control

messages" 80

Check Gas Cap 195

Checking the air pressure,

refer to Tire inflation

pressure 196

Child-restraint fixing system

LATCH 56

Child restraints 54

Child restraint systems 54

Child-safety lock 57

Child seats 54

Chime, refer to Check

Control 79

Chock 215

Chrome parts, care, refer to

Caring for your vehicle

brochure

Cigarette lighter 115

Cleaning, refer to Caring for

your vehicle brochure

"Climate" 50,106

Clock 74

– 12h/24h mode 83

– setting time and date 82

Closing

– from inside 32

– from outside 30

Closing fuel filler cap 195

Clothes hooks 114

Cockpit 10

Cold start, refer to Starting

engine 59

"Comfort", active backrest

width adjustment 47

Comfort access 38

– observe in car wash 40

– replacing battery 40

Comfort area, refer to Around

the center console 14

Comfort operation

– windows with comfort

access 39

– with comfort access 39

Comfort seat 46

"Communication" 178,189

"Communication

settings" 188

Compact Disc

– refer to CD changer 165

– refer to CD player 165

Compact wheel

– inflation pressure 197

– wheel change 216

Compartment for remote

control, refer to Ignition

lock 58

Compartments

– in cargo area 118

– refer to Storage area

package 119

– refer to Storage

compartments 114

Compressed audio files 165

Computer 75

– displays on Control

Display 76

– hour signal 83

"Concert hall", refer to Tone

control 154

Condition Based Service

CBS 209

"Confirmation" 31

Connecting car vacuum

cleaner, refer to Connecting

electrical devices 115

Consumption, refer to

Average fuel

consumption 75

Consumption indicator

– Energy Control 75

Consumption statistics, refer

to Average fuel

consumption 75

"Continue guidance to

destination?" 145

"Contrast" with BMW Night

Vision 100

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Everything from A to Z

240

Control Center, refer to

iDrive 16

Control Display, refer to

iDrive 16

– setting brightness 83

Controller, refer to iDrive 16

Controls, refer to Cockpit 10

Convenience operation

– glass sunroof 31

– windows 31

Convenience start, refer to

Starting engine 59

Coolant 207

– checking level 207

– temperature 74

Cooling, maximum 107

Cornering Brake Control

CBC 86

Country of destination for

navigation 134

Courtesy lamps 104

Cover, roll-up cover,

Sports Wagon 117

Cradle for telephone or mobile

phone 113

Cruise control 66,67

– active cruise control 67

Cruising range 75

Cup holders 114

Curb weight, refer to

Weights 229

Current fuel consumption 75

"Current position" 148

Current position

– displaying 148

– entering 140

– storing 140

"Curve mode" with

BMW Night Vision 100

"Customer

Relations" 182,190

Cylinders, refer to Engine

data 226

D

Dashboard, refer to

Cockpit 10

Data 226

– capacities 230

– dimensions 227

– engine 226

– technical data 226

– weights 229

"Date" 83

Date 74

– display format 83

– retrieval 74

– setting 83

"Date format" 83

Daytime running lamps 102

DBC Dynamic Brake

Control 86

"Deactivated" 48

Deactivating selector lever

interlock 64

Decommissioning the vehicle,

refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure

Defect

– fuel filler door 194

– glass sunroof 42

– luggage compartment lid 34

– tailgate 36

Defrosting windows 107

Defrosting windows and

removing condensation 107

Defrost position, refer to

Defrosting windows 107

"Delete address book" for

navigation system 142

"Delete all numbers" for

mobile phone 181

"Delete data" for navigation

system 142

"Delete" for mobile

phone 181

Destination address

– deleting 141

– entering 133,136

Destination for navigation

– destination list 139

– entering via voice 136

– entry 133

– selecting from address

book 141

– selecting using

information 138

– storing 140

Destination guidance 144

– bypassing route

sections 148

– canceling voice

instructions 53

– changing specified

route 142

– displaying routes 145

– distance and arrival 144

– interrupting 144

– starting 144

– terminating/continuing 144

– voice instructions 147

– volume of voice

instructions 147

Destination list for

navigation 139

Destinations recently driven

to 139

"Details" in audio mode 167

"Dial" for mobile phone 179

"Dial number" 179

"Diamond button" 53

Diamond button 53

Digital clock 74

Digital radio, refer to High

Definition Radio 160

Dimensions 227

Directional indicators, refer to

Turn signals 64

Direction announcements,

refer to Voice

instructions 147

Direction instructions, refer to

Voice instructions 147

Directory for navigation, refer

to Address book 140

Displacement, refer to Engine

data 226

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

241

At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

"Display" 84

Display, refer to iDrive 16

Display lighting, refer to

Instrument lighting 104

"Display off" 21

Displays, refer to Instrument

cluster 12

"Display settings" 82

Displays on the windshield,

refer to Head-Up Display 96

Disposal

– battery of remote control

with comfort access 40

– vehicle battery 218

Distance, refer to

Computer 76

Distance cruise control, refer

to Active cruise control 67

"Distance to dest." 76

Distance to destination, refer

to Computer 76

Distance warning, refer to

PDC Park Distance

Control 85

Divided rear seat back, refer to

Through-loading

system 116

Door entry lighting 104

Door key, refer to Keys/

remote control 28

Door lock 32

Door locking, acknowl-

edgment signals 31

"Door locks" 30

Doors

– manual operation 32

– remote control 30

DOT Quality Grades 200

Draft-free ventilation 108

Drinks holder, refer to Cup

holders 114

Drive mode 62

"Driver's door only" 30

Driving lamps, refer to Parking

lamps/low beams 101

Driving notes 124

Driving route, refer to

Displaying route 145

Driving stability control

systems 86

Driving through water 125

Driving tips, refer to Driving

notes 124

Dry air, refer to Cooling

function 107

Drying the air, refer to Cooling

function 107

DSC Dynamic Stability

Control 86

– indicator lamp 13,87

DTC Dynamic Traction

Control 87

– activating 87

– indicator lamp 13,87

DVD for navigation 132

Dynamic Brake Control

DBC 86

Dynamic Drive 89

Dynamic Driving Control 62

Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 86

Dynamic Traction Control

DTC 87

E

Easy entry/exit 52

– backrest width 47

Eject button, refer to Buttons

on CD player 152

Electrical malfunction

– door lock 32

– driver's door 32

– fuel filler door 194

– glass sunroof, electric 42

– luggage compartment lid 34

– panorama glass sunroof 44

– tailgate 36

Electric steering wheel

adjustment 52

Electronic brake-force

distribution 86

Electronic oil level check 205

Emergency call 219

Emergency operation, refer to

Manual operation

– door lock 32

– driver's door 32

– fuel filler door 194

– glass sunroof 42

– luggage compartment lid 34

– panorama glass sunroof 44

– selector lever interlock,

automatic transmission 64

– tailgate 36

Emergency release for

luggage compartment lid in

luggage compartment 34

Emergency services, refer to

Roadside Assistance 220

"Emission inspect." 78

"Enable services" 188

"End call" 179

"End Night Vision" 100

Energy-conscious driving,

refer to Energy Control 75

Energy Control 75

Engine

– breaking-in 124

– data 226

– overheated, refer to Coolant

temperature 74

– speed 226

– starting 59

– starting, comfort access 38

– starting difficulties 59

– switching off 60

Engine compartment 205

Engine coolant 207

Engine oil

– adding 206

– additives, refer to Approved

engine oils 206

– approved engine oil 206

– checking oil level 205

– electronic oil level check 205

"Engine oil level" 206

Engine output, refer to Engine

data 226

Engine overheating, refer to

Coolant temperature 74

Engine speed 226

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Everything from A to Z

242

Engine starting, refer to

Starting engine 59

"Enter address" 134,140

Entering destination via town/

city name 134

Entering the

address 133,136

Entering the intersection 135

Entering town/city for

navigation 134

Entering zip code for

navigation 135

"Entertainment" 152

"Entertainment

settings" 153,160

Entertainment sound output

on/off 153

Entry map for destination 137

"Equalizer", refer to Tone

control 155

Equalizer, refer to Tone

control 155

"ESN" 162

ESP Electronic Stability

Program, refer to DSC

Dynamic Stability

Control 86

Event Data Recorders 210

Exhaust system, refer to Hot

exhaust system 124

Exterior mirrors 51

– automatic dimming

feature 125

– automatic heating 51

– folding in and out 51

– tilting down passenger-side

exterior mirror 52

External audio

device 114,171

Eye for tow-starting and

towing, refer to Tow

fitting 221

F

"Fader", refer to Tone

control 154

Fader, refer to Tone

control 154

Failure messages, refer to

Check Control 79

False alarm, refer to Avoiding

unintentional alarms 38

Fastening safety belts, refer to

Safety belts 49

– warning lamp 49

Fastest route for

navigation 142

"Fast route" for

navigation 143

"Favorites" calling up with

radio 159

First aid, refer to First-aid

kit 220

First-aid kit 220

Flashing during locking/

unlocking, refer to Setting

confirmation signals 31

Flashlight, refer to

Rechargeable flashlight 113

Flat tire

– changing wheels 215

– compact wheel 216

– Flat Tire Monitor 89,90

– run-flat tires 90,93,201

– TPM Tire Pressure

Monitor 91

Flat Tire Monitor 89

– false alarms 90

– initializing system 90

– show chains 203

– system limits 90

– warning lamp 90

Flat tires, refer to Tire

condition 201

"FM", reception

range 152,156

FM, waveband 156

Fog lamps 104

– indicator lamp 13,104

Folding rear seat

back 116,117

Fold-over rear seat

back 116,117

Footbrake, refer to Braking

safely 125

Footwell lamps 104

Forward, fast

– CD changer 169

– CD player 169

For your own safety 5

4-wheel drive system, refer to

xDrive 87

Freeway, refer to Route

criteria 142

Front airbags 94

Front armrest, refer to Center

armrest, front 113

Front passenger airbags,

deactivating 95

Front seat adjustment 46

"FTM" 90

FTM, refer to Flat Tire

Monitor 89

Fuel 195

– capacity 230

– display 75

– high-quality brands 195

– quality 195

– specifications 195

Fuel clock, refer to Fuel

gauge 75

Fuel consumption display,

computer, average fuel

consumption 75

Fuel display, refer to Fuel

gauge 75

Fuel filler door 194

– releasing in the event of

electrical malfunction 194

"Full screen" with BMW Night

Vision 100

Fuses 218

G

Garage door opener, refer to

Integrated universal remote

control 111

Gasoline, refer to Required

fuel 195

Gasoline display, refer to Fuel

gauge 75

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

243

At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Gear changes

– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 63

– SMG Sequential Manual

Transmission 62

Gear display

– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 63

– SMG Sequential Manual

Transmission 61

Gearshift lever, manual

transmission 60

Gearshift lever positions,

manual transmission 60

General driving notes 124

Glass sunroof, electric 41

– auto-remote operation from

outside 32

– comfort operation with

comfort access 39

– moving manually 42

– remote control 31

Glove compartment 113

– lighting 113

– rechargeable flashlight 113

GPS navigation, refer to

Navigation system 132

Grills, refer to Ventilation 108

Grills of the automatic climate

control 105

Gross vehicle weight, refer to

Weights 229

H

Halogen lamps 212

Handbrake 60

– indicator lamp 13,60

Hand lamp, refer to

Rechargeable flashlight 113

Hands-free system, refer to

Microphone 14

Hazard warning flashers 15

HD, refer to High Definition

Radio 160

"HDC" 88

HDC Hill Descent Control 88

"HDC on" 88

"HDC on / off" 53

Head airbags 94

Headlamp control,

automatic 101

Headlamp flasher 64

Headlamps 101

– care, refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure

– cleaning, refer to Wiper

system 66

– replacing bulbs 212

Head Light, refer to Adaptive

Head Light 102

Head restraints 48

– front head restraints,

active 49

– sitting safely 45

"Head-Up Display" 97

Head-Up Display 96

Heated

– mirrors 51

– rear window 107

– seats 50

– steering wheel 52

Heating 105

– exterior mirrors 51

– interior 105

– rear window 107

– residual heat 108

– seats 50

– steering wheel 52

Heating with engine switched

off, refer to Residual

heat 108

Heavy cargo, refer to Securing

cargo 128

Height, refer to

Dimensions 227

Height adjustment

– seats 46

– steering wheel 52

High-beam assistant 103

High beams 102

– headlamp flasher 102

– indicator lamp 13

– replacing bulbs 212

High Definition Radio 160

High water, refer to Driving

through water 125

Hill Descent Control HDC 88

Hills 126

Holder for cups 114

"Home address" for

navigation system 142

Homepage 4

Hood 204

Horn 10

Hot exhaust system 124

"Hour memo" 83

"House number" for desti-

nation entry 136

Hydraulic brake assistant,

refer to DBC Dynamic Brake

Control 86

Hydroplaning 125

I

IBOC, refer to High Definition

Radio 160

Ice, refer to Outside temper-

ature warning 74

ID3 tag, refer to Information on

track 167

iDrive 16

– assistance window 20

– automatic climate control

with expanded scope 106

– changing date and time 82

– changing language 84

– changing menu page 19

– changing settings 82

– changing units of measure

and display type 84

– confirming selection or

entry 19

– controller 16

– controls 16

– displays, menus 17

– selecting menu item 19

– setting brightness 83

– start menu 17

– status information 20

– symbols 18

Ignition 58

– switched off 58

– switched on 58

Ignition key, refer to Keys/

remote control 28

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Everything from A to Z

244

Ignition key position 1, refer to

Radio readiness 58

Ignition key position 2, refer to

Ignition on 58

Ignition lock 58

– starting engine with comfort

access 40

Independent ventilation, refer

to Parked car ventilation 109

Indicator/warning lamps

– active steering 94

– airbags 96

– brake fluid 207

– brake pads 208

– DSC 13,87

– DTC 13,87

– Flat Tire Monitor 90

– fog lamps 13

– safety belt warning 49

– TPM Tire Pressure

Monitor 92

Indicator and warning

lamps 13

Individual air distribution 107

Individually programmable

buttons on steering

wheel 53

Individual settings, refer to

Personal Profile 29

Inflation pressure, refer to Tire

inflation pressure 196

Inflation pressure monitoring

– refer to Flat Tire Monitor 89

– refer to TPM Tire Pressure

Monitor 91

Information

– on another location 138

– on current position 138

– on destination location 138

"Information" for navigation

system 138

"Information on

destination" 140

"Initializing..." 90

Initializing

– Flat Tire Monitor 90

– radio, refer to Storing

stations 158

– refer to Power failure 218

– refer to Setting time and

date 82

– seat, mirror and steering

wheel memory 47

"Input map" 138

Installation location

– CD changer 169

– mobile phone 113

– navigation drive 132

Instructions for navigation

system, refer to Voice

instructions 147

Instrument cluster 12

Instrument illumination, refer

to Instrument lighting 104

Instrument lighting 104

Instrument panel

– refer to Cockpit 10

– refer to Instrument

cluster 12

Integrated key 28

Integrated universal remote

control 111

Interesting destination for

navigation 138

"Interim time" 82

Interior lamps 104

– switching on with remote

control 31

Interior motion sensor 38

– switching off 38

Interior rearview mirror 52

– automatic dimming

feature 125

Interlock on automatic

transmission 63

Intermittent mode of the

wipers 65

J

Jacking points 216

Joystick, refer to iDrive 16

Jumpering, refer to Jump

starting 220

Jump starting 220

K

Keyless-Go, refer to Comfort

access 38

Keyless opening and closing,

refer to Comfort access 38

Key Memory, refer to Personal

Profile 29

"Keypad" 182

Keys 28

– key-related settings, refer to

Personal Profile 29

Kick-down

– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 64

– SMG Sequential Manual

Transmission 62

Knock control 195

L

Lamps, refer to Parking lamps/

low beams 101

Lamps and bulbs 212

"Languages" 84

– for navigation system 147

Lashing eyes, refer to

Securing cargo 128

Last destinations, refer to

Destination list 139

"Last seat pos." 48

LATCH child-restraint fixing

system 56

Length, refer to

Dimensions 227

License plate lamp, replacing

bulbs 215

Light-emitting diodes

LEDs 212

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

245

At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Lighter 115

Lighter socket 115

"Lighting" 65,102

Lighting

– instruments 104

– of the vehicle, refer to

Lamps 101

– refer to High-beam

assistant 103

Light switch 101

"Limit" 81

Loading

– securing cargo 128

– stowing cargo 127

– vehicle 126

"Lock after driving" 33

Lock buttons in the doors,

refer to Locking 33

Locking

– from inside 33

– from outside 31

– setting confirmation

signals 31

– without key, refer to Comfort

access 38

Locking and unlocking doors

– from inside 32

– from outside 30

– setting confirmation

signals 31

Locking out, refer to

Unlocking 39

Locking without key, refer to

Comfort access 38

Low beams 101

– automatic 101

– replacing bulbs 212

Lower back support, refer to

Lumbar support 46

Lug bolts 216

– tightening torque, refer to

After mounting 217

– wrench 215

Luggage compartment

– capacity 229

– emergency release 34

– locking separately 34

– opening/closing, refer to

Luggage compartment lid/

tailgate 33

– opening from inside 33

– opening from outside 34

– opening with remote

control 31

Luggage compartment cover,

refer to Roll-up cover 117

Luggage compartment lid 33

– emergency operation, refer

to Manual operation 34

– emergency release 34

– locking separately 34

– opening from inside 33

– opening from outside 34

– unlocking and locking from

inside 32

– unlocking manually 34

Luggage net, refer to

Separation net 118

Luggage rack, refer to Roof-

mounted luggage rack 128

Lumbar support 46

LW, waveband 156

M

M+S tires, refer to Winter

tires 202

Maintenance

– refer to Service and

Warranty Information

Booklet for US models 209

– refer to Service

requirements 77

– refer to Warranty and

Service Guide Booklet for

Canadian models 209

Maintenance system 209

Malfunction warnings, refer to

Check Control 79

Manual air distribution 107

Manually controlled recircu-

lated air 108

Manual mode

– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 64

– SMG Sequential Manual

Transmission 62

"Manual" on the radio 157

Manual operation

– door lock 32

– driver's door 32

– fuel filler door 194

– glass sunroof 42

– luggage compartment lid 34

– panorama glass sunroof 44

– selector lever interlock,

automatic transmission 64

Manual transmission 60

"Map direction of travel" 146

Map display 146

Map display facing north 146

"Map facing north" 146

Map for navigation

– changing scale 146

– destination entry 137

Master key, refer to Keys/

remote control 28

Maximum cooling 107

Maximum speed

– for winter tires 202

– with compact wheel 217

Memory, refer to Seat, mirror

and steering wheel

memory 47

Menus, refer to iDrive 16

Microfilter 109

Microphone

– for mobile phone 14

– for voice command

system 14

Mirror dimming feature 125

Mirrors 51

– automatic curb monitor 52

– folding in and out 51

– heating 51

– memory, refer to Seat, mirror

and steering wheel

memory 47

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Everything from A to Z

246

"Missed calls" 180

Missed calls 180

Mobile communications

devices in vehicle 125

Mobile phone

– accepted calls 180

– adjusting volume 178

– calling 179

– ending call 179

– installation location, refer to

Center armrest 113

– missed calls 180

– operation via iDrive 178

– redialing 180

– refer to separate operating

instructions

– Top 8 180

– touch tone dialing, refer to

Tone dialing method 182

Mobile phones, use in the

interior, refer to Mobile

communications

devices 125

Monitor, refer to iDrive 16

Monitoring pressure of tires,

refer to Flat Tire Monitor 89

"Monitor on / off" 53

Most recent numbers

for mobile phone 180

MP3, refer to Compressed

audio files 165

Multi-function steering wheel,

refer to Buttons on steering

wheel 11

Multifunction switch

– refer to Turn signals/

headlamp flasher 64

– refer to Wiper/washer

system 65

Music track, finding 167

"Mute on / off" 53

MW, waveband 156

N

"Navigation" 76,133

Navigation destination

– home address 142

– manual entry 133

– selecting via map 137

Navigation drive, installation

location 132

Navigation DVD 132

Navigation instructions, refer

to Switching voice instruc-

tions on/off 147

Navigation system 132

– address book 140

– bypassing route

sections 148

– destination entry 133

– destination guidance in

assistance window 132

– destination list 139

– displaying current

position 148

– entering a destination

manually 133

– entering destination via

voice 136

– last destinations 139

– opening 133

– route display 145

– route list 146

– searching for a special

destination 138

– selecting destination using

information 138

– selecting destination via

map 137

– selecting route criteria 142

– starting destination

guidance 144

– switching off, refer to Termi-

nating/continuing desti-

nation guidance 144

– terminating/continuing

destination guidance 144

– voice instructions 147

– volume adjustment 147

"Navigation voice

instructions" 53

"Navigation voice instructions

on" 147

Neck support, refer to Head

restraints 48

"New address" for navigation

system 140

"New destination" 133,137

New remote control 28

"New route" 148

New wheels and tires 201

"Next entertainment

source" 53

Night Vision, refer to

BMW Night Vision 98

Night vision device, refer to

BMW Night Vision 98

"Night Vision on / off" 53

"Normal", active backrest

width adjustment 47

Nozzles, refer to Windshield

washer nozzles 66

Nylon rope, refer to Tow-

starting and towing 221

O

OBD socket 210

Octane ratings, refer to Fuel

specifications 195

Odometer 74

Oil

– additives, refer to Approved

engine oils 206

– approved engine oils 206

– capacity 230

– consumption, refer to

Checking engine oil

level 205

– level 205

– refilling, refer to Adding

engine oil 206

Oil change intervals, refer to

Service requirements 77

"On a new destination" for

navigation system 139

Onboard computer, refer to

iDrive 16

"Onboard info" 76

Onboard toolkit 211

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

247

At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

"On destination" 139

"On location" 139

Opening and closing

– comfort access 38

– from inside 32

– from outside 30

– panorama glass sunroof 43

– using remote control 30

– using the door lock 32

Operation by voice for mobile

phone 183

– adjusting volume 184

– canceling 183

– commands 183

– correcting phone

number 184

– dialing phone number 184

– placing a call 184

– redialing 185

– voice phone book 184

"Options" 190

Orientation menu, refer to

Start menu 17

Output, refer to Engine

data 226

Outside air, refer to AUC

Automatic recirculated-air

control 108

Outside temperature

display 74

– changing unit of measure 84

– in computer 84

P

Panic mode 31

Panorama glass sunroof 43

– moving manually 44

Park Distance Control PDC 85

"Parked car operation" 109

"Parked car ventilation" 109

Parked car ventilation 109

– activating activation

time 110

– preselecting activation

times 109

– switching on and off

directly 109

Parking, vehicle 60

Parking aid, refer to PDC Park

Distance Control 85

Parking assistant, refer to

PDC Park Distance

Control 85

Parking brake, refer to

Handbrake 60

Parking lamps 101

– replacing bulbs 213

Parts and accessories 6

Passenger airbags, deacti-

vating, refer to Exception for

front passenger seat 54

Passenger-side exterior

mirror, tilting down 52

"Pathway lighting" 102

Pathway lighting 101

"PDC" 86

"PDC display on" 86

PDC Park Distance Control 85

Personal Profile 29

"Perspective" 146

"Phone" 179

Phone book 178

Phone numbers

– deleting from phone

book 181

– dialing 179

– most recent numbers 180

– selecting in phone book 180

– Top 8 180

Pinch protection system

– glass sunroof, electric 42

– panorama glass sunroof 43

– power windows 41

Plasters, refer to First-aid

kit 220

"Play"

– in audio mode 166

– on the radio 163

Plug-in unit for remote

control, refer to Ignition

lock 58

Pollen, refer to Microfilter/

activated charcoal filter 109

Position

– displaying 148

– storing 140

Power failure 218

Power windows, refer to

Windows 40

Preselecting activation times

of the parked car

ventilation 109

"Presets" on the radio 156

Pressure, tires 196

Pressure monitoring of tires,

refer to TPM Tire Pressure

Monitor 91

"Profile" 191

Programmable buttons on

steering wheel 53

Protective function, refer to

Pinch protection system

– glass sunroof, electric 42

– panorama glass sunroof 43

– windows 41

R

Radio

– Autostore 157

– controls 152

– High Definition Radio 160

– sampling stations 157

– satellite radio 161

– selecting frequency

manually 157

– selecting reception

range 152

– selecting waveband 156

– station search 157

– station selection 156

– station with the best

reception 157

– storing stations 158

– switching on/off 152

– tone control 153

– volume 153

– Weather Band, refer to

Weather news flashes 159

Radio key, refer to Keys/

remote control 28

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Everything from A to Z

248

Radio position, refer to Radio

readiness 58

Radio readiness 58

– switched off 58

– switched on 58

– with comfort access 39

Rain sensor 65

"Random", random play

sequence 168

"Random all" in audio

mode 169

"Random directory" in audio

mode 169

"RDS" 159

Reading lamps 104

Rear armrest, refer to Center

armrest, rear 116

Rear lamps, refer to Tail

lamps 213

– replacing bulbs 213

Rear seat back,

folding 116,117

Rear seats

– adjusting head restraints 49

– folding over

backrest 116,117

– heating 50

Rear ventilation 109

Rearview mirror 51

Rear window

– changing wiper blade 211

– heating 107

– opening and closing on

Sports Wagon 34

– roller sun blind, refer to Sun

blinds 112

– window wiper on Sports

Wagon 66,126

Rear window safety switch 41

"Received calls" 180

Reception

– quality 159

– radio stations 159

– regional station 157

Reception level of mobile

phone, refer to Status

information 20

Rechargeable flashlight 113

Recirculated-air mode

– air recirculation 108

– AUC Automatic recircu-

lated-air control 108

Reclining seat, refer to

Backrest 46

Recording times, refer to

Stopwatch 81

"Redial" for mobile phone 180

Reflectors, refer to Tail

lamps 213

Refueling 194

Releasing, hood 204

"Relock door if not

opened" 33

Remaining distance, refer to

Cruising range 75

Remaining distance to desti-

nation, refer to Computer 76

Remote control 28

– battery replacement 40

– comfort access 38

– garage door opener 111

– luggage compartment lid 31

– malfunction 31,40

– tailgate 31

Removing condensation on

the windows 107

"Repeat directory" in audio

mode 168

"Repeat" in audio mode 168

"Repeat track" in audio

mode 168

Replacement fuses 218

Replacement of tires, refer to

Changing wheels 215

Replacing bulbs, refer to

Lamps and bulbs 212

Replacing tires 202

Replacing wheels/tires, refer

to New wheels and tires 201

Reporting an accident, refer

Initiating an emergency

call 219

Reporting safety defects 7

Reserve warning, refer to Fuel

gauge 75

Reservoir for washer

systems 66

"Reset" 92

– stopwatch 82

– tone settings 155

Reset, refer to Resetting tone

settings 155

Residual heat 108

Restraint systems

– for children 54

– refer to Safety belts 49

Retaining straps, refer to

Storage area package 119

Retreaded tires 202

Reverse, fast

– CD changer 169

– CD player 169

Reverse gear

– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 63

– manual transmission 61

– SMG Sequential Manual

Transmission 61

Road map 146

"Roadside

Assistance" 182,189

Roadside Assistance 220

Roadside parking lamps 102

– replacing bulbs 213

Roller sun blind, refer to Sun

blinds 112

Roll-up cover, Sports

Wagon 117

Roof load capacity 229

Roof-mounted luggage

rack 128

Rope, refer to Tow-starting

and towing 221

Rotary pushbutton, refer to

iDrive 16

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

249

At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Route 142

– bypassing sections 148

– changing 142,148

– displaying 145

– displaying arrow display 145

– displaying map 146

– displaying town 146

– list 146

– selecting 142

– selecting criteria 142

Route map, refer to Map

display 146

"Route preference",

changing 142

Route selection 142

RSC, refer to Run-flat

tires 201

Run-flat tires 201

– continuing driving with a

damaged tire 90,93

– flat tire 90,93

– new wheels and tires 201

– tire inflation

pressure 90,93,196

– tire replacement 201,202

S

Safety 5

Safety belts 49

– damage 50

– sitting safely 45

– warning lamp 49

Safety belt tensioners

– refer to Airbags 94

– refer to Safety belts 49

Safety systems

– ABS Antilock Brake

System 86

– airbags 94

– DSC Dynamic Stability

Control 86

– safety belts 49

Satellite radio 161

– enabling channel 162

– selecting channel 162

– storing channel 162

"SAT" with radio 152,162

"Save current

destination" 142

"Scan"

– sampling stations 157

– sampling tracks 167

Scan

– CD changer 167

– CD player 167

– radio 157

"Scan all" in audio mode 167

"Scan directory" in audio

mode 167

Screen, refer to iDrive 16

Screw thread for tow

fitting 222

SDARS, refer to Satellite

radio 161

"Seat heater distribution" 50

Seats 46

– active backrest width

adjustment 47

– adjusting the seats 46

– comfort seat 46

– easy entry/exit 47

– heating 50

– lumbar support 46

– memory, refer to Seat, mirror

and steering wheel

memory 47

– sitting safely 45

– storing the setting 47

– thigh support 46

– ventilation, refer to Active

seat ventilation 51

Securing load

– refer to Securing cargo 128

– with ski bag, refer to

Securing cargo 120

"Select as destination" 139

"Select current speed" 81

Selecting audio sources, refer

to Operation via iDrive 152

Selecting distance for active

cruise control 69

Selecting frequency

manually 157

Selecting menu items 19

Selecting new scale for

navigation 146

Selecting route 142

Selection options with

navigation system 142

Selector lever

– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 63

– SMG Sequential Manual

Transmission 61

Selector lever interlock, refer

to Shiftlock

– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 63

– SMG Sequential Manual

Transmission 61

Selector lever positions

– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 63

– SMG Sequential Manual

Transmission 61

Self-leveling suspension 89

Separation net 118

Sequential Manual Trans-

mission SMG 61

"Service" 77,188,205

Service, refer to Roadside

Assistance 220

Service and Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet for US

models 209

Service interval indicator, refer

to Service requirements 77

"Service notification" 189

"Service Request" 182,190

"Service

requirements" 78,188,206

Service requirements 77

– also refer to CBS Condition

Based Service 209

"Service Status" 188

"Set"

– in audio mode 152

– on trip computer 77

"Set date" 83

"Set service date" 78

"Set time" 83

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Everything from A to Z

250

Settings

– BMW Night Vision 99

– changing on Control

Display 82

– clock, 12h/24h mode 83

– configuring, refer to

Personal Profile 29

Setting speed limit 81

Setting time, refer to Prese-

lecting activation time 109

"Set tire pressure" 90

Shifting gears

– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 64

– SMG Sequential Manual

Transmission 62

Shiftlock

– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 63

– SMG Sequential Manual

Transmission 61

Shift paddles 62

Short commands of voice

command system 231

"Short route" for

navigation 143

Short route in navigation, refer

to Selecting route 142

Shoulder support 46

"Show current position" 138

"Show destination

position" 138

Shuffled, refer to Random

– CD changer 168

– CD player 168

Side airbags 94

Side marker lamps, replacing

bulbs 213

Side turn signals, replacing

bulbs 213

Side window blinds, refer to

Sun blinds 112

Signal horn, refer to Horn 10

Sitting safely 45

– with airbags 45

– with head restraint 45

– with safety belts 45

Ski bag 120

Sliding/tilt sunroof

– refer to Glass sunroof,

electric 41

– refer to Panorama glass

sunroof 43

Slope assistant, refer to

Starting assistant 125

SMG Sequential Manual

Transmission 61

– acceleration assistant 63

– breaking-in 124

– Dynamic Driving Control 62

– gear display 61

– kick-down 62

– shiftlock 61

– towing 222

– tow-starting 223

Snow chains 203

Socket for Onboard

Diagnostics interface 210

Socket for remote control,

refer to Ignition lock 58

Sockets, refer to Connecting

electrical devices 115

Soft closure aid, refer to

Automatic soft closing 33

Song search with CD, refer to

Playing a track 167

SOS, refer to Initiating an

emergency call 219

Spare fuses 218

Spare key 28

– adapter 28

Spare remote control 28

Spare wheel

– refer to Changing

wheels 215

– refer to Compact wheel 216

Special oils, refer to Approved

engine oils 206

Specified oil grades, refer to

Approved engine oils 206

Speed

– with compact wheel 217

– with winter tires 202

Speed-dependent

volume 154

Speed limit warning, refer to

Speed limit 81

Speedometer 12

"Speed volume", refer to Tone

control 154

"Sport", active backrest width

adjustment 47

Sport program, refer to

Dynamic Driving Control 62

Sports Wagon

– automatic roll-up cover 117

– automatic tailgate

operation 36

– compartments in cargo

area 118

– increasing cargo area 117

– opening rear window 34

– opening tailgate 35

– panorama glass sunroof 43

– rear window wiper 66

– rear window wiper, changing

wiper blade 211

– releasing fuel filler door in

event of electrical

malfunction 194

– roll-up cover 117

– roll-up cover for cargo

area 117

– self-leveling suspension 89

– separation net 118

– socket in cargo area 116

– storage area package 119

– tail lamps, replacing

bulbs 214

Stability control, refer to

Driving stability control

systems 86

"Star button" 53

Star button 53

Start/Stop button 58

"Start" for stopwatch 82

"Start guidance" 136,144

Starting, refer to Starting

engine 59

Starting assistance, refer to

Jump starting 220

Starting assistant 125

Starting difficulties

– jump starting 220

– refer to Special starting

conditions 59

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

251

At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Starting off on slopes, refer to

Starting assistant 125

Start menu, iDrive 17

"Start route guidance" 138

"Start service" 189

"State / Province" for desti-

nation entry 134

"State inspection" 78

Station, refer to Radio 156

"Stations", presets 163

"Status" 78

Status of this Owner's Manual

at time of printing 5

Steering wheel

– adjustment 52

– buttons on steering

wheel 11

– easy entry/exit 52

– heating 52

– lock 58

– locking 58

– memory 47

– programmable buttons 53

"Steering wheel buttons" 53

Steering-wheel shift buttons,

refer to Shift paddles 62

Steering with variable ratio,

refer to Active steering 93

Steptronic, refer to Automatic

transmission with

Steptronic 63

"Stop" for stopwatch 82

"Stopwatch" 82

Stopwatch 81

Storage area package 119

Storage compartments 114

"Store in address book" for

navigation system 140

"Store" on the radio 158,163

Storing current position 140

Storing radio stations 158

Storing sitting position, refer

to Seat, mirror and steering

wheel memory 47

Storing tires 202

Straps, refer to Loading 128

"Street" for destination

entry 135

Summer tires, refer to Wheels

and tires 196

Sun blinds 112

"Surround Settings", refer to

Tone control 154

SW, waveband 156

Switches, refer to Cockpit 10

Switching between high

beams and low beams,

automatic, refer to High-

beam assistant 103

Switching cooling function on

and off 107

Switching off engine 60

Switching off tilt alarm

sensor 38

Switching on

– audio 152

– CD changer 152

– CD player 152

– radio 152

Switching on hour signal 83

Swiveling headlamps, refer to

Adaptive Head Light 102

Symbols 4

– indicator/warning lamps 13

T

Tachometer 74

"Tailgate" 36

Tailgate 33,35

– automatic operation 36

– locking and unlocking from

inside 32

– opening from inside, Sports

Wagon 35

Tail lamps 213

– replacing bulbs 213

Tank contents, refer to

Capacities 230

Target cursor for

navigation 138

Technical alterations, refer to

For your own safety 5

Technical data 226

Telematic, refer to

TeleService,

BMW Assist 187

Telephone, refer to Mobile

phone 174

"Telephone list" 53

TeleService 187

– enabling 187

– services offered 188

Temperature

– adjusting in upper body

region 106

– adjusting with automatic

climate control 106

– of coolant, refer to Coolant

temperature 74

Temperature display

– outside temperature 74

– setting units 84

– temperature warning 74

Temperature warning 74

Tempomat, refer to Cruise

control 66

"Terminate services" 190

"Text language" 84

"Theater", refer to Tone

control 154

The individual vehicle 5

Third brake lamp, refer to

Center brake lamp 214

Through-loading system 116

Tightening torque of the lug

bolts, refer to After

mounting 217

Tilting down passenger-side

exterior mirror 52

"Time" 83

"Time format" 83

Timer, refer to Preselecting

activation time 109

"Timer 1" for parked car

ventilation 110

"Timer 2" for parked car

ventilation 110

Tire inflation pressures 196

Tire pressure loss 90,91

Tire pressure monitoring,

refer to Flat Tire Monitor 89

Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 91

Tire Quality Grading 200

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Everything from A to Z

252

Tire replacement, new wheels

and tires 201

Tires

– age 200

– air loss 90,92

– breaking-in 124

– changing 201

– condition 201

– damage 201

– flat tire, refer to Changing

wheels 215

– inflation pressure 196

– new wheels and tires 201

– pressure monitoring 89

– pressure monitoring, refer to

TPM Tire Pressure

Monitor 91

– replacing 215

– retreaded tires 202

– run-flat tires 201

– size 199

– tread 201

– wear indicators 201

– wheel/tire combination 201

– winter tires 202

"Tone" 153

Tone dialing method 182

Tone in audio mode

– adjusting 153

– middle setting 155

Tone on locking/unlocking 31

Tools, refer to Onboard

toolkit 211

"Top 8" for mobile phone 180

Torque

– engine 226

– lug bolts, refer to After

mounting 217

Touch tone dialing, refer to

Tone dialing method 182

Tow fitting 221

Towing 221

– tow fitting 221

"Town / City" for destination

entry 134

Tow-starting 221,223

"TPM" 92

TPM Tire Pressure

Monitor 91

– resetting system 92

– system limits 91

– warning light 92

Tracks

– random play sequence 168

– sample scan 167

Track width, refer to

Dimensions 227

Traction-assist feature, refer

to DSC Dynamic Stability

Control 86

Traction control, refer to DSC

Dynamic Stability

Control 86

Traffic congestion, refer to

Bypassing route

sections 148

Transmission

– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 63

– deactivating selector lever

interlock on automatic

transmission with

Steptronic 64

– manual transmission 60

– SMG Sequential Manual

Transmission 61

– starting assistant 125

Transporting children

safely 54

Transport securing device,

refer to Securing cargo 128

Tread depth, refer to Minimum

tire tread 201

Treble, refer to Tone

control 153

"Treble", tone control 154

"Trip computer" 77

Trip computer 76

Trip-distance counter, refer to

Trip odometer 74

"Triple turn signal

activation" 65

Trip odometer 74

Turning circle, refer to

Dimensions 227

Turn signals 64

– indicator lamp 12

– replacing bulbs 213

U

Underbody protection, refer to

Caring for your vehicle

brochure

Uniform Tire Quality Grading/

UTQR 200

"Units" 84

Units

– average fuel

consumption 84

– temperature 84

Universal garage-door

opener, refer to Integrated

universal remote

control 111

Universal remote control 111

"Unlock button" 30

Unlocking

– from inside 33

– from outside 30

– without key, refer to Comfort

access 38

Unlocking without key, refer to

Comfort access 38

"Update services" 190

"Use current location as

address" 140,142

Used batteries

– refer to Disposal 218

– refer to Replacing battery 40

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

253

At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

V

Valve screw caps, refer to

After mounting 217

Vehicle

– battery 217

– breaking-in 124

– care 210

– care, refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure

– dimensions 227

– loading 126

– parking 60

– washing, refer to Caring for

your vehicle brochure

– weights 229

Vehicle jack 215

– jacking points 216

Vehicle position, refer to

Displaying current

position 148

"Vehicle settings" for

unlocking 30

Ventilation 108

– draft-free 108

– in the rear 109

– while stationary 109

Venting, refer to

Ventilation 108

Vent outlets of the automatic

climate control 105

Vents, refer to Ventilation 108

"Vent settings" 107

Voice, refer to Destination

guidance with voice

instructions 147

Voice command system 22

– short commands 231

Voice instructions for

navigation system 147

– muting 53

– repeating 53,147

– switching on/off 53,147

– volume 147

Voice phone book 184

Volume 152

– audio sources 152

– mobile phone 178

– setting speed-

dependent 154

– voice instructions 147

W

Warning lamps, refer to

Indicator and warning

lamps 13

Warning messages, refer to

Check Control 79

Warning triangle 219

Warranty and Service Guide

Booklet for Canadian

models 209

Washer fluid 66

– capacity of the reservoir 66

Washer fluid reservoir 66

Water on roads, refer to

Driving through water 125

Waveband for radio 156

"WB" 152,160

Wear indicators in tires, refer

to Minimum tread depth 201

Weather news flashes 159

Website 4

Weights 229

Wheel/tire combination, refer

to New wheels and tires 201

Wheel/tire damage 201

Wheelbase, refer to

Dimensions 227

Wheels and tires 196

Width, refer to

Dimensions 227

Windows 40

– auto-remote operation from

outside 32

– comfort operation with

comfort access 39

– convenience operation 31

– rear window, Sports

Wagon 34

– safety switch 41

Windshield

– cleaning, refer to Wiper

system 66

– defrosting, refer to

Defrosting windows 107

– displays, refer to Head-Up

Display 96

Windshield washer system

– refer to Wiper system 65

– windshield washer

nozzles 66

Windshield wipers, refer to

Washer system 65

– wiper blade

replacement 211

Winter tires 202

– setting speed limit 81

– storage 202

Wiper blade replacement 211

Wiper system 65

– rain sensor 65

– washer fluid 66

– windshield washer

nozzles 66

"With highways" for

navigation system 143

Word matching principle for

navigation 143

Working in the engine

compartment 204

Wrenches/screwdrivers, refer

to Onboard toolkit 211

X

xDrive 87

Xenon lamps 213

– replacing bulbs 213

Z

"Zoom" with BMW Night

Vision 100

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Refueling

So that you will have important specifications

available when you stop to refuel, we recom-

mend that you supplement the following tables

with data which apply to your vehicle. Consult

the index for individual specifications.

Fuel

Engine oil

Tire inflation pressure

Designation

Please enter your preferred fuel here.

Quality

Summer tires

Front Rear

Winter tires

Front Rear

Up to 4 persons

5 persons or 4 plus luggage

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

01 41 0 012 211 ue

*BL001221100X*

The Ultimate

Driving Machine

More about BMW

bmwusa.com

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

5 US-En

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG